Volume 7, Issue 10(1), October 2018 International Journal of Multidisciplinary Educational Research

Published by Sucharitha Publications 48-12-3/7, Flat No: 302,Alekya Residency Srinagar, Visakhapatnam – 530 016 Andhra Pradesh – India Email: [email protected] Website: www.ijmer.in

Editorial Board Editor-in-Chief Dr.K. Victor Babu Associate Professor, Institute of Education Mettu University, Metu, Ethiopia

EDITORIAL BOARD MEMBERS

Prof. S.MahendraDev Prof. Fidel Gutierrez Vivanco Vice Chancellor Founder and President Indira Gandhi Institute of Development Escuela Virtual de AsesoríaFilosófica Research Lima Peru Mumbai Prof. Igor Kondrashin Prof.Y.C. Simhadri The Member of The Russian Philosophical Vice Chancellor, Patna University Society Former Director The Russian Humanist Society and Expert of Institute of Constitutional and Parliamentary The UNESCO, Moscow, Russia Studies, New Delhi & Formerly Vice Chancellor of Dr. ZoranVujisiæ Benaras Hindu University, Andhra University Rector Nagarjuna University, Patna University St. Gregory Nazianzen Orthodox Institute

Universidad Rural de Guatemala, GT, U.S.A Prof. (Dr.) Sohan Raj Tater

Former Vice Chancellor Singhania University, Rajasthan Prof.U.Shameem Department of Zoology Andhra University Visakhapatnam Prof.K.SreeramaMurty Department of Economics Dr. N.V.S.Suryanarayana Andhra University - Visakhapatnam Dept. of Education, A.U. Campus Vizianagaram Dr.V.Venkateswarlu Assistant Professor Dr. Kameswara Sharma YVR Dept. of Sociology & Social Work Asst. Professor AcharyaNagarjuna University, Guntur Dept. of Zoology Sri.Venkateswara College, Delhi University, Prof. P.D.Satya Paul Delhi Department of Anthropology Andhra University – Visakhapatnam I KetutDonder Depasar State Institute of Hindu Dharma Prof. Josef HÖCHTL Indonesia Department of Political Economy University of Vienna, Vienna & Prof. Roger Wiemers Ex. Member of the Austrian Parliament Professor of Education Austria Lipscomb University, Nashville, USA

Prof. Alexander Chumakov Dr. N.S.Dhanam Chair of Philosophy Department of Philosophy Russian Philosophical Society Andhra University Moscow, Russia Visakhapatnam

Dr.B.S.N.Murthy Dr.TonQuangCuong Department of Mechanical Engineering Dean of Faculty of Teacher Education GITAM University University of Education, VNU, Hanoi Visakhapatnam Prof. Chanakya Kumar Dr.S.VLakshmanaRao Department of Computer Science Coordinator University of Pune,Pune A.P State Resource Center Visakhapatnam Prof. DjordjeBrankoVukelic Department for Production Engineering Dr.S.Kannan University of Novi Sad, Serbia Department of History Annamalai University Prof.Shobha V Huilgol Annamalai Nagar, Chidambaram Department of Pharmacology Off- Al- Ameen Medical College, Bijapur Dr. B. Venkataswamy H.O.D.,& Associate Professor Prof.JosephR.Jayakar Dept. of Telugu, P.A.S. College Department of English Pedanandipadu, Guntur, India GITAM University Dr.E. Ashok Kumar Hyderabad Department of Education North- Eastern Hill University, Shillong Prof.FrancescoMassoni Department of Public Health Sciences Dr.K.Chaitanya University ofSapienza, Rome Department of Chemistry Nanjing University of Science and Prof.MehsinJabelAtteya Technology Al-Mustansiriyah University People’s Republic of China College of Education Department of Mathematics, Iraq Dr.Merina Islam Department of Philosophy Prof. RonatoSabalzaBallado Cachar College, Assam Department of Mathematics Dr. BipashaSinha University of Eastern Philippines,Philippines S. S. Jalan Girls’ College University of Calcutta,Calcutta Dr.SenthurVelmurugan .V Librarian Prof. N Kanakaratnam Kalasalingam University Dept. of History, Archaeology & Culture KrishnankovilTamilnadu Dravidian University, Kuppam Andhra Pradesh Dr.J.B.Chakravarthi

Dr. K. John Babu Assistant Professor Department of Journalism & Mass Comm Department of Sahitya Central University of Kashmir, Kashmir Rasthritya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, Tirupati

Dr.T.V.Ramana Prof. R. Siva Prasadh Department of Economics, Andhra University Institute of Advanced Studies in Education Campus, Kakinada Andhra University, Visakhapatnam

® © Editor-in-Chief, IJMER Typeset and Printed in India www.ijmer.in IJMER, Journal of Multidisciplinary Educational Research, concentrates on critical and creative research in multidisciplinary traditions. This journal seeks to promote original research and cultivate a fruitful dialogue between old and new thought.

Volume 7 C IssueO N T 10 E( N1) T S October2018 S. Pg.

No No 1. Social Entrepreneurship- Sustainability and Social Impact 1 Creation G.Stanley Jaya Kumar 2. The Truth about Entity 9 Rabindranath Chattopadhyay 3. Aspiration of Secondary School Students 22 K. V. Jeeva Rathina and V. Kaliswari 4. Micro Finance through Joint Liability Groups (JLGS) in India 32 Yeddala Narasimhulu and S.V Subba Reddy 5. A Descriptive Survey Study to Assess Attitude towards Nursing 42 Profession and Future Intention of Nursing Students of Selected Nursing Colleges of Vadodara, Gujarat HinaDamor, Gamit Pritesh, Bariya Manisha, Borisagar Chhaya, Patel Dhinal, Ravindra H.N and Ekta Patel 6. Political Empowerment of Women 56 R. Raghupathi Reddy 7. Blended Learning - An Innovative Programme in Teaching and 63 Learning Indu Dahiya 8. A Case Study of Municipal Administration W.R.T. Tuni 72 Municipality, E.G.Dist, A.P B. Prabhakara Rao and J. Pandu Rangarao 9. Glocalization as Globalization: Evolution and Transformation of 84 A Sociological Concept S. Balaji 10. Corporate Social Responsibility and Education: A Comparative 97 Study of Government and Private Sectors in YSR Kadapa District of Andhra Pradesh V. Ebenezer Immanuel 11. Attitude of Workers towards Safety Management System in 109 Rourkela Steel Plant Mamata Nayak, Lalata Keshari Pani and Barada Prasad Bhol 12. A Study on Effectiveness of Financial Services in Economic 124 Development of India R.Rama Krishna

13. Analytic Solution for Two Dimensional Time Fractional Beam 130 Equation Using Reduced Differential Transform Method Bikila Biru Jaleta 14. Change Inhibiting Cultural Factors MILCH Cattle Scheme in 148 Agency Areas of Andhra Pradesh: A Study on Jatapu and Savara Tribes Ch Bapu Haranath and D. Ramesh 15. Legal Protection to Women Victims: Acid Attacks 155 I.Ramasundari,N.B.Chandrakala and A.Gowreeswari 16. Impact of MGNREGs on the Socio-Economic Conditions of the 160 Rural People in Chittoor Dt. A.P. – An Analysis C. Malleswaramma and N.Murali 17. Role of MGNREGs in Livelihood of Rural People in Chittoor Dt. 172 An Analysis C. Malleswaramma 18. Financial Performance of Sangam Dairy Through Ratio Analysis 178 Shiril Bhanu Shaik and D.A.R.Subrahmanyam 19. A Study of Devadasi System 187 Raji.M 20. Economic Reforms and their Impact in Agriculture Development 198 of India N.Sharmila 21. Kanhailal’sPebet As A Resistance Play 208 Swathy H 22. Poverty Alleviation: A Study of Indian Government Role and 217 Success Ravikumar S. Naik

ISSN : 2277 – 7881 Dr. K. VICTOR BABU Impact Factor :5.818 (2017) M.A.,M.A.,M.Phil.,Ph.D.,PDF, (D.Lit) Index Copernicus Value: 5.16 Associate Professor, Institute of Education & Editor-in-Chief International Journal of Multidisciplinary Educational Research (IJMER) &Sucharitha: A Journal of Philosophy and Religion Mettu University, Metu, Ethiopia.

Editorial……

It is heartening to note that our journal is able to sustain the enthusiasm and covering various facets of knowledge. It is our hope that IJMER would continue to live up to its fullest expectations savoring the thoughts of the intellectuals associated with its functioning .Our progress is steady and we are in a position now to receive evaluate and publish as many articles as we can. The response from the academicians and scholars is excellent and we are proud to acknowledge this stimulating aspect. The writers with their rich research experience in the academic fields are contributing excellently and making IJMER march to progress as envisaged. The interdisciplinary topics bring in a spirit of immense participation enabling us to understand the relations in the growing competitive world. Our endeavour will be to keep IJMER as a perfect tool in making all its participants to work to unity with their thoughts and action. The Editor thanks one and all for their input towards the growth of the Knowledge Based Society. All of us together are making continues efforts to make our predictions true in making IJMER, a Journal of Repute

Dr.K.VictorBabu Editor-in-Chief

SOCIAL SCIENCES, HUMANITIES, COMMERCE & MANAGEMENT, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY, MEDICINE, SCIENCES, ART & DEVELOPMENT STUDIES, LAW www.ijmer.in

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

SOCIAL ENTREPRENEURSHIP- SUSTAINABILITY AND SOCIAL IMPACT CREATION

Prof.G.Stanley Jaya Kumar Head, Chairman BOS and SVU Academic Senate Member Department of Sociology S.V.University,Tirupati

Introduction India’s economy is growing rapidly and heading towards accelerated growth in the years to come. The government has initiated interventions such as: Make in India campaign, Digital India, ease of doing business, skill mission, Swachh Bharat Abhiyan, Clean Ganga Mission etc. These initiates would improve investment climate and further growth. A section of population are benefitting from this growth. However there are over 300 and more million poor people who are not adequately benefitted from this growth. Unfortunately, Growth and development need not be directly correlated and this is evident from rising inequality in India. The Sustainable Livelihoods Approach (SLA) became a dominant paradigm for development interventions in the 1990s following the World Commission on Environment and Development (WCED, more popularly the Brundtland Commission), meeting in 1986 and the subsequent White Paper on International Development‘ by DFID (Department of International Development) in 1997. The Government of India too adopted this approach in the 11th and 12th Five Year Plans, wherein the need for training professionals who could work at different levels of organizations promoting sustainable livelihoods for the poor was articulated as a policy objective and strategy. A significant change in the livelihoods ecosystem in India occurred with the launch of the National Rural Livelihood Project (NRLP) following success in few states that got transformed into the National Rural Livelihood Mission (NRLM) in all the states of India in 2012. NRLM has opened up participation, involvement and rethinking on livelihoods across India in recent times building on experiences of several civil society organizations, academics and government programmes. Social entrepreneurship has its importance at this cross road to promote livelihoods for the vast majority of the neglected, marginalized poor population of the nation. In recent years, many non-governmental players have initiated market based solutions that can provide social benefit and be profitable. These initiatives cover a diverse range of sectors - Health, Education, Water and Sanitation, Housing, Livelihoods etc. that provide social benefit while being economically profitable. A large of number of private sector firms and social entrepreneurs have shown

1

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 interest in them and are committed to market based solutions. However, very few have achieved meaningful scale. There is the need for linkage between government, funding agencies and social entrepreneurs to utilize the resources effectively and efficiently for the promotion of livelihood to address the problems of deprived society. Social entrepreneurship is important for sustainable development because it creates economic growth. Social entrepreneurship creates innovative solutions to mobilize resources for sustainable development. Social entrepreneurship is a process of involving innovative opportunities to address social needs and change. Here we discuss how to begin a social enterprise to convert an idea into action and scale it up to impact a social need. Further various strategies and structures are analyzed in different areas to find out livelihood opportunities in different sectors through social entrepreneurship models. The risks, challenges and vulnerabilities also briefly touched upon to be more realistic in the social entrepreneurial approach to address the problem of sustainable livelihoods. Begin with an Idea An idea can change the world, is clear from the new discoveries in the electronic world. It also matters how do you formulate and transform the idea into reality that is marketable and also addressing a social need. Personal experience, social needs, social assets, and change can stimulate promising ideas, but only if the social entrepreneur can adopt an opportunity oriented mindset, actively looking for new possibilities to have significant positive social impact. Harvard psychologist Ellen Langer illustrates this mindset in a study of the attitudes of school children toward people with disabilities. Langer presented children in certain classrooms with a picture of a person in a wheelchair and asked, “Can this person drive a car?” The answer was an overwhelming ‘no,’ along with lots of reasons why not. In other classrooms, Langer asked a slightly different question, “How can this person drive a car. After a brief pause, students came up with many ideas about how a person in a wheelchair could drive a car. Successful social entrepreneurs embody this “how can” attitude, particularly in the idea generation phase. How can I translate my personal experience into broad social impact? How can I address a particular social need or make the most of existing social assets to improve society? How can I capitalize on recent changes to create new opportunities for social impact? Effective social entrepreneurs carry this orientation into the opportunity development process, engaging in continuous innovation, adaptation, analysis and learning along the way. In order to determine whether a promising idea can be transformed into an opportunity worthy of serious pursuit, it is essential for the social entrepreneur to articulate a compelling social impact theory and a plausible business model. Developing a plausible business model requires designing an effective operating model and crafting a viable resource strategy. These pieces must fit together, and

2

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 the assumptions embedded in them must be credible given the environment in which the social entrepreneur intends to operate. Finally, the requirements of the venture must fit the commitment, qualifications, and life stage of the entrepreneur considering it. When all these elements are feasible and aligned, the chances for success are relatively high and those involved can make a more informed estimate of the potential for social impact. Program Strategy From a programmatic perspective, social enterprise addresses one of the most pressing issues nonprofit organizations face–how to achieve ongoing sustainable impact. In some organizations social enterprise is highly compatible with the mission and hence, is a natural program fit. For example, program activities concerned with economic development revolve around work and wealth creation. The missions and objectives of social welfare and human development organizations focused on employment training and welfare-to- work transitioning also mesh neatly with social enterprise as a program methodology. Agricultural organizations offer ample opportunities to many program activities of sustainable crop cultivation and livestock rearing with social enterprises that process food or sell fair trade products, etc. In view of promoting the livelihood through social entrepreneurship models it is good to explore some of the sectors which could be utilized. Those sectors are briefed below within the framework of social enterprise development. Sectors in social entrepreneurship This describes a number of profit sectors and some social enterprise applications in those sectors. There can be lists and social enterprise can be applied in any profit sector, particularly if is it used as a financing strategy. Economic Development Economic development is a sector that uses social enterprise as a sustainable program strategy to create economic opportunities and community wealth-building to enable poor people to attain economic security for themselves and their families. In many cases, business activities are "embedded" within the economic development organization; the social enterprise is the program–the means to effect social impact. Some of the possible social impact goals include increased household income, asset accumulation, investments in productive activities, job creation, increased school attendance, improved health, and quality of nutrition. To site a few examples; Across the rural areas of northern Cajamarca in Peru, Intermediate Technology Development Group (ITDG) is providing electricity through hydroelectric power, creating employment, and increasing income in these communities and the purpose is, to improve living conditions of rural communities in Peru by increasing access to electricity through the establishment of sustainable microenterprises that generate power from renewable energy sources. SKS India is yet another example. Vikram

3

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Akula started SKS India with a mission of empowering the poor to become self- reliant through affordable loans. SKS believes that access to basic financial services can significantly increase economic opportunities for poor families and in turn help improve their lives. Since inception, SKS has delivered a full portfolio of microfinance to the poor in India and we are proud of our current outreach. As a leader in technological innovation and operational excellence, SKS is excited about setting the course for the industry over the next five years and is striving to reach our goal of 15 million members by 2012. Environmental Conservation "Eco enterprises" offer a wealth of creative methods to both raise money for, and awareness of, environmental issues. Eco-tourism's growing popularity provides lucrative opportunities to social entrepreneurs interested in capturing intrepid travellers. The tourist market, unlike many nonprofit "client markets," has money; therefore this business easily marries the social enterprise's financial and social objectives. Many environmental social enterprises also sell products, such as shade-grown coffee or items made from recycled materials. In other examples, environmental social enterprises operate organic markets or home delivery food businesses to finance sustainable agriculture and education programs. Social Welfare and Human Development In some social welfare and human development organizations, there is crossover with employment development and job training programs, whereby the social service organization creates jobs and develops skills for clients–homeless, physically and mentally disabled, and at-risk populations–through a social enterprise. Human development organizations that target recovering drug addicts and alcoholics, former welfare recipients, or ex-convicts use social enterprises as rehabilitative programs. In other cases, the social welfare organization may commercialize its social services to a private pay market to fund its programs. For example, Aravind Eye Hospital and Auro lab by Dr. Govindappa Venkataswamy and David Green started trust at Madurai, India with a mission of making medical technology and health care services accessible, affordable and financially self-sustaining. Founded in 1976 by Dr. G. Venkataswamy, Aravind Eye Care System today is the largest and most 5 productive eye care facility in the world. From April 2007 to March 2008, about 2.4 million persons have received outpatient eye care and over 285,000 have undergone eye surgeries at the Aravind Eye Hospitals at Madurai, Theni, Tirunelveli, Coimbatore and Puducherry. Blending traditional hospitality with state-of-the-art ophthalmic care, Aravind offers comprehensive eye care in the most systematic way attracting patients from all around the world.

4

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Arts and Cultural Preservation Within the context of the cultural organization, social enterprise offers a range of possibilities to serve social and financial objectives. Selling cultural products through outlets such as an art gallery, cinema or theatre; or educational services such as art, drama, music, cultural history, etc. are common social enterprise examples. Health In the health sector, nonprofit organizations have been incorporating social enterprise for many years. Hospitals and clinics are common examples. Pharmacies, medical supply companies, and group purchasing businesses are also widely applied models. Selling health services is a growing industry in social enterprise: nutrition counseling, physical therapy, mental health counseling, care management, and alternative therapies. Agriculture Agricultural production, sustainable farming, food processing and animal rearing offer many social enterprise opportunities for rural communities in developing countries where few other economic opportunities exist. In the United States, social enterprises in the agricultural sector range from nonprofit or cooperative organic farms to economic development organizations that support entrepreneurs and small scale producers (cheese, jam, salsa, beer, etc.). Education Educational institutions have long used social enterprise as a means to diversify their income and strengthen education programs. Tuition or "fee-for- service" is the obvious method used by schools, colleges and universities. Many universities obtain research contracts with the government or private sector. Specialized skill or technology institutions provide an option to follow the service subsidization model by repackage classic education to new markets for a fee. Children and Youth Many nonprofit organizations serving adolescents and young adults, particularly from lowincome families, conduct entrepreneurship and vocational skills training, or run hands-on business programs such as youth run enterprises or incubators. These types of program provide multiple opportunities for integrating social enterprise programs within the organization. Other children and youth organizations operate child-focused enterprises such as birthday parties, camp, after school programs, test preparation, tutorials, classes, extracurricular activities and sports. Program Areas or Program activities described in this section are not comprehensive, rather they relate only to social enterprise programs. All technical program areas have numerous activities not elaborated herein.

5

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Economic Opportunities Economic opportunities programs focus on starting social enterprises for the express purpose of creating fair-wage jobs or employment opportunities in a geographic target area. Other program activities center on developing transferable skills, job placement, or opportunities that foster self employment. Economic opportunities programs may be single-focused on business or integrated with other social services such as insurance, literacy, health education, etc. Community and Rural Development Community and rural development programs develop community-based social enterprises aimed to provide local jobs, increase purchasing power, reduce urban flight, increase community wealth, and strengthen community cohesion. These social enterprises may be designed as community businesses intended to benefit the entire community by investing surplus revenue in wells, schools, libraries, community centers, gardens, etc., or as more traditional small and medium scale enterprises (SMEs). Market Development Market development programs start or support social enterprises that spur and facilitate growth in underdeveloped and under-served markets. These social enterprises operate in markets that are unattractive to private companies due to high market penetration costs (often related to rural distribution and educational marketing), slim margins, or both. The objective is to provide access to vital good and services to marginalized communities while strengthening markets to entice private sector players. Employment Development Employment development creates employment and vocational training for disenfranchised, disabled or at-risk populations. These so-called "hard-to- employ" people earn a livable wage and develop marketable skills through their employment in the social enterprise. For example from a co-operative field, is AMUL (Anand Milk Union Limited). Dr. Verghese Kurien started a Co- operative organization AMUL. Amul has been a sterling example of a co- operative organization‘s success in the long term. It is one of the best examples of cooperative achievement in the developing economy. The Amul Pattern has established itself as a uniquely appropriate model for rural development. Amul has spurred the White Revolution of India, which has made India the largest producer of milk and milk products in the world. Another example of successful venture is Shri Mahila Griha Udyog Lijjat Papad of Mumbai, India. Shri Mahila Griha Udyog Lijjat Papad is a Women‘s organization manufacturing various products from Papad, Khakhra, Appalam, Masala, Vadi, Gehu Atta, Bakery Products, Chapati, SASA Detergent Powder, SASA Detergent Cake (Tikia), SASA Nilam Detergent

6

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Powder, SASA Liquid Detergent. The organization is wide-spread, with its Central Office at Mumbai and it’s Branches and Divisions in different states all over India. The organization started off with a paltry sum of Rs.80 and has achieved sales of over Rs.300 crores with exports itself exceeding Rs. 12 crores. Membership has also expanded from an initial number of 7 sisters from one building to over 40,000 sisters throughout India. The success of the organization stems from the efforts of its member sisters who have withstood several hardships with unshakable belief in the strength of a woman’. These are notable stories of livelihood generation through social entrepreneurship. Microenterprise Development Programs that foster the growth and development of microenterprises (businesses that employ 1-10 people) and self-employed people (micro-entrepreneurs) through the provision of affordable credit or business support services (training, technology, market information, etc.). For example the Grameen Bank. Muhammad Yunus started Grameen Bank. Grameen Bank (GB) has reversed conventional banking practice by removing the need for collateral and created a banking system based on mutual trust, accountability, participation and creativity. GB provides credit to the poorest of the poor in rural Bangladesh, without any collateral. At GB, credit is a cost effective weapon to fight poverty and it serves as a catalyst in the overall development of socio-economic conditions of the poor who have been kept outside the banking orbit on the ground that they are poor and hence not bankable. Professor Muhammad Yunus, the founder of Grameen Bank and its Managing Director, reasoned that if financial resources can be made available to the poor people on terms and conditions that are appropriate and reasonable, these millions of small people with their millions of small pursuits can add up to create the biggest development wonder. As of May, 2009, it has 7.86 million borrowers, 97 percent of whom are women. With 2,556 branches, GB provides 8 services in 84,388 villages, covering more than 100 percent of the total villages in Bangladesh. Those sectors sited above are only a few among the vast majority of the sectors of social entrepreneurship that could be planned and implemented. Now we discuss a few important elements that social entrepreneurs should keep in mind while promoting livelihood activities. Promotion of livelihood and the role of effectuation Effectuation is nothing but decision making based on the effect and not cause. There is uncertainty, risk and challenges involved in any decision making. Be ready to change the decisions as per the situation. It must be innovative and challenging. The social entrepreneur should be vigilant about the felt needs and real needs of the target group whose social problems he addresses. People are conscious about the felt need. For example a group of women who walks mile together to fetch water

7

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 destroyed the water taps when it was constructed close to their homes as their felt need was the walk, socializing with other women and to be away from their harassing husbands at home although water was their real need. Market fluctuations and various trends and shocks that can come on the way should be guarded off in the growth process of social enterprise. Conclusion Social entrepreneurship is one of the best methods for the promotion of livelihood. As livelihood is focused on addressing the social needs of the marginalized social enterprise has the similar goal. The social and economic sustainability is the focus of both. This paperhas dealt with the various sectors of livelihood promotion through social entrepreneurial activities given with examples. It is recommended to go through more case studies and to find out how the social enterprises scale up in the whole process of generating livelihoods. Sustainability and social impact creation are key areas of concentration to make lasting results in the promotional attempts. REFERENCES 1. BORZAGA, C., DEFOURNY, J. (eds) (2001), The Emergence of Social Enterprise, London, Routledge. 2. BENINGTON, J., MOORE, M. H. (eds) (2011), Public Value, Theory and practive, New York, Palgrave Macmillian. 3. BARTHELEMY, A., SLITINE, R. (2011), Entrepreneuriat social, Innover au service de l’intérêt général, Paris, Vuibert. 4. DEFOURNY, J., NYSSENS, M. (2010), Conceptions of social enterprises and social enterpreneurship in Europe and in the United States; convergences and divergences, Journal of Social Enterpreneurship, 1(1), 32-53 5. DEFOURNY, J., NYSSENS, M. (2011), Approches européennes et américaines de l’entreprise sociale: une perspective comparative, RECMA, Revue Internationale des Etudes coopératives, mutualistes et associatives, 319, 18-35. 6. USTIN, J., STEVENSON, H., WEI-SKILLERN, J. (2006), Social and Commercial Entrepreneurship: Same, Different or Both?, Entrepreneurship: Theory and Practice, 30(1), 1-22. 7. YUNUS, M. (2008), Vers un nouveau capitalisme, Paris, Le Livre de Poche. 8. YUNUS, M. (2007), Creating a World without Poverty: Social Business and the Future of Capitalism, New York, Public Affaires Books. 9. Raghda El Ebrashi (2013) The German University in Cairo | GUC · Faculty of Management Technology (MNGT) 10. David Di Zhang & Lee A. Swanson, Journal of Social Entrepreneurship, Volume 5, 2014 - Issue 2 Published Online: 07 Feb 2014.

8

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

THE TRUTH ABOUT ENTITY

Rabindranath Chattopadhyay Haripal G.D.Institution, Haripal Hooghly, West Bengal, and Indian Centre for Sapce Physics Kolkata,West Bengal,India

Abstract:

‘Entity’ is a ‘Truth’ and ‘Truth’ is an entity. Entities can be perceived and conceived too while ‘truth’ can only be perceived. The fundamental characteristic of ‘Entity’ is explored analytically in the perspective of present state of epistemological human wisdom in this article.

Key words: Entity, Philosophy

Introduction:

‘Entity’ is the existence, the existence per se. Existence of everything, knowledge and science, religion and anarchy, customs and manner, rules and principles, discipline, superstitions, indifference, all virtues, matters and objects, energy, mind and body, space and time and all that have existence are all entities. Existence of any such entity is always perceived by means of mutual interaction between that entity and another entity. Therefore for a specific single perception at least two entities are required which again are situated at the two ends of a single truth-axis. According to Newton’s third law of motion at least two objects are required to produce a set of combine action and reaction. It may appear to people in general that perception is a process that inevitably includes a human being or even a living being. But this is rather shallow interpretation of perception and the world that is perceived by human beings in general is a very microscopic domain within the whole universe. The word ‘perception’ mentioned here has been used in much deeper sense. The perception is certainly a sense-dependent concept. But what is ‘sense’ in general? Do only the so-called living beings have sense? Does any being that has sense mean a living being only? Is there any such being in this universe which has not any sense? Many learned persons, scientists and philosophers, complexity-investigators all around the globe have been continuously engaging themselves in searching for the answers to many such basic questions. Some of the significant consequences in brief of such and such investigations and research in different perspective have

9

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 been arranged in a logical sequence semi-critically synthesized and presented summarily in this article.

Interpretation and discussion: Entities in general can be divided broadly into two different classes as the following;

Entity / \ Material entity Non-material entity / \ \ / Matter Energy \ / \ / I \ / I Beings Spiritual Energy / \ I Non-living beings Living beings I \ / I \ / + I {LIFE}------⤶

Different processes involved in the living of lives move on through innumerable set of interactions round and round in various cycles. If one considers every single interaction as a single occurrence then the one and only one unique thread- like entity on the basis of which all those events can be arranged sequentially, in a frame identifying before and after and also in a continuous chain of cause and effect alternately obeying the law of causation is none other than what we call ‘Time’. Measurement of time is relative and according to Einstein’s theory of relativity depends on the reference frame. The absolute time remains unknown for ever and it is the eternal truth. ‘Time’ is overpowered by ‘Truth’. T.H.Huxley says “Time , whose teeth gnaws away everything else is powerless against the Truth.” We all search for that very truth. But what we get at the end of our endeavour is only a relative truth i,e. a truth by part. The absolute truth remains beyond revelation and maintains in a state of singularity. While considered in a comparative perspective ‘Philosophy’ is by-synthetic,’a-priori’ ‘deductive’ method while ‘Science’ is by–analytic, a-posteriorie, inductive method. If the ‘Philosophy’ is considered to be centrifugal in nature then the ‘science’ may be considered to be ‘centripetal’. Therefore these two are complementary to each other. Science proceeds spirally around epistemology in aspiration of the search for a central truth. So let the discussion on the central theme of this article be started in the light of scientific endeavour.

10

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

According to the scientific findings that are established yet the Universe started its journey from a ‘Big Bang’.With that enormous bang there were produced trillions of degree Celsius temperature and almost an immeasurable amount of energy. That huge amount of energy was running in the form of radiations all around the Universe from one edge to another farthest one. Then it was a radiation-dominated Universe (RDU). Whoever can say perhaps even a small part of that earliest originated radiation survives even today to tell us about the relics of the remotest ancient time. Following the ‘Big Bang’ the Universe began to expand and thereby helping the incumbent-temperature dip down to a range so that solid matter could be formed. Energy began to transform into matter; But that matter was neither macrocosmic nor of appreciable size to human beings. Then that matter was in its subtlest form, the seed of matter or rather particulate entity. In reality what is the most subtle (tiniest) particulate entity, what is its physical properties are still inaccessible. According to precise speculation based on the theory derived by the expert mathematicians and physicists the most elementary particles hypothesized to play the role of most fundamental seed of matter is perhaps the one which has been being searched for in the famous LHC lab in France. The concept of fundamental particle is inconclusive and ever- evolving . One can now trace from coarse nucleons(protons ,neutrons ,mesons etc.) to quark ,gluons ,charm ,beauty and colour etc. through one track while to tinny string and stringlet through another track and also to tachyon ,various field-quanta ,DeBroglie-wave through Schrödinger-wave-function representation through other tracks. Whatever particle it may be and however tinniest that may be might have been produced within an ensemble in the Big Bang or near Big Bang moment scientists yet do explain things from a little later to Big Bang. Gradually energy (radiation) had been decreasing at the cost of increasing matter in particulate form. At first ,as far as the present knowledge tells us,the ‘Quarks’ was formed and then they evolved to form protons , neutrons and electrons and then nucleus around which electrons started revolving to produce stable lightest atom ;Hydrogen atom. In the remotest areas within pervading darkness of infinite universe trillions of trillions hydrogen atoms started forming hydrogen molecules and then subsequently to form gigantic molecular hydrogen clouds all frozen due to their low temperature and therefore non-luminous. Those clouds of very very large volume being farthest away from each other in the infinite span of the Universe started contracting centrally under strong self-gravitational pull among those innumerable molecules to finally collapse and then explode with generation of an unthinkable amount of energy that started the process of thermonuclear fusion. This process is the first step towards the formation of stars from previously frozen bulk of hydrogen molecular clouds scattered over the infinite space of the Universe in which hydrogen nuclei within clouds coalesce each other to form helium nuclei. In this

11

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 way a star is born and passes through its youth scientifically known as ‘Main Sequence State’. Stars, within which all hydrogen nuclei in the aforementioned process are exhausted after being transformed into Helium nuclei starts blowing out to delve into a complete darkness. Radiation-pressure starts getting lost for ever. Gravitational pressure within the stellar envelope then single-handedly dominates to make the whole bulk collapse again during a period of as many as million or billion years or so to produce again a Big bang within the stellar envelope. Then with this Bang it starts again another sequel of transformation from Helium nucleus to nucleus of Lithium. This is the second stretch of a new life of a star which it transforms from a hot Lithium core into a Lithium star in. Hydrogen clouds having accumulated a vast amount of Hydrogen nuclei in its early life of formation continues in their respective stellar states following a transformation-sequel of Helium-Lithium- Beryllium-Boron-Carbon-….and so on stars. In course of such transformation from one heavy star to the next heavier state ,if by chance some stars could have accumulated huge initial mass at its first pre-main sequence state ,could become supernova that under extraordinarily high pressure in one of its collapsing state exploded. Many such explosions could provide sufficient kinetic energy for the explosion-remnants to scatter away to remote corners of the expanding Universe. Universe became matter-dominated. Thus is the history of creation of matter in the Universe. Now let us come to creation of life. That too can be interpreted on the basis of scientifically established theories and knowledge gathered till date. The well recognized metaphysical hypothesis and other theories of creation of life that are available until today are mainly five in number that are given below; 1) Special creation by supernatural power at a time; 2) Spontaneous generation arose from nonliving matter on numerous occasion; 3) Steady state ,No origin; 4) Cosmozoan theory of Panspermia and the like ; 5) Biochemical evolution (Oparin- Haldane theory ; Miller’s Experiment; Crick- Orgel Theory) Among all the above-mentioned theories the last one is perhaps the most acceptable scientifically established theory of creation of life. Before going to discuss the theory in a little detail it will be relevant to understand why the two words ‘life’ and ‘animal’ are being considered in a single ensemble! This is so because the root as far as creation of living entities is concerned ,lies in the mystery of creation and evolution of ‘Protoplasm’. It will be interesting to quote the Greek philosopher Aristotle, who advocated the theory of spontaneous generation and thought about it; “For nature passes from lifeless objects to animals in such unbroken sequence interposing between them being which live and yet are not animals that scarcely any difference seems to exist between neighboring groups owing to their close

12

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 proximity….”- Miller’s experiment demonstrate that strong electrical discharges under a very high voltage through an artificially made cloud of carbon-based i,e. cyanogenic molecules such as , , , produce macromolecular life-related components Adenine, Amino Acids ,simple Carbohydrates and Ribose. Following this experiment Crick and Orgel succeeded in a similar experiment to produce nucleotide. Then applying coacervation to separate colloids from their respective water-solutions the formation of long chain among macromolecules like Amino Acids, Proteins , Nucleic Acids, Carbohydrates and Lipids were obtained in a compact matrix so as to yield the seeds of life. Even after that the scientists are of opinion that “Details of transformation from complex non-living materials to simple living organisms remain a mystery”[2]. Parallel with the theory of Biochemical Evolution on the Earth the cosmozoan theory of external origin of seeds of life is going very strong as far as scientific feasibility is concerned. Extra-terrestrial root of life has two principal different schools of thoughts ,namely (i)The theory of Panspermia due to Sir Fred Hoyle and Prof.Chandra Wickramsinghe [3];(ii) Ufology and life from other worlds[4]. The main proponent of the Panspermia Sir Fred Hoyle said that “Many had been the experiment that claimed to demonstrate the spontaneous emergence of life (through Biochemical Evolution) but always ,when such experiments were repeated with better precessions the claimed results were shown to be incorrect”. Their theory proposes that the seeds of life were brought into the terrestrial atmosphere and on the Earth being carried forward from alien world with the tail of comets and with the influx of meteors into the terrestrial atmosphere. In course of time from then ,gradually undergoing evolution and adaptation in various steps within favourable circumsphere ultimately the whole of the terrestrial Biosphere came into reality. As per the other school of thought, from places where there are favourable gaseous protosphere or metasphere compared with the terrestrial biosphere and must have harboured lives of various nature from remote past lives of different intellectual grade from naïve to smart might have travelled through space on UFO(Unidentified Flying Object)and came to the Earth to populate its surface with living beings as such.By way of analyzing the root- cause of creation of living cell Biochemists have observed that the central content of the unit of terrestrial lives ,i,e.the cell is carbon and probably for this reason the food-stuff that the terrestrial lives (mainly animal)live on also comprise of carbon as the only single major content.The lives in the terrestrial biosphere are therefore collectively known as Carbon-based lives. Catenation is the very very unique property of Carbon which briefly refers to the property of forming long-chain-macromolecules[4]. The other very similar element is ‘silicon’ which immediately follows Carbon in the periodic table and both of

13

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 them besides being semiconductor have got many similar physico-chemical properties including Catenation to some extent. Scientists therefore believe that alike the terrestrial biosphere consisting of Carbon-based lives biosphere comprising Silicon-based lives is not at all an impossibility. Planets, Planetoids ,Asteroids etc. that are rich in Silica could have driven Nature to generate and nurture a society of Silicon-based lives the individual and social behavior of which is yet unknown. Relevant to mention here that ‘Mars’ is known to be rich in Silica. Now the prime question is ‘what is the very specific significant feature/features (single or a set of )that help distinctly identify a living being from nonliving ones?’ There is no dearth of informational data in the multitude of varieties in the world of living beings and their interaction with nonliving-world. But it is no non-heavenly task to sort out from those data-sea a finite set of distinguishing features that separate living beings from nonliving beings. As said by Francois Jacob ‘An organism is alive only while it continues expecting to live ,even if only for another instant there is not a single moment ,not a single gesture that does not imply an afterward , a later , a transition to the next moment.[5].’In the mechanically transformed language of intelligent machine the principle of variation due to Wiener-Shamon-Asbee is as follows;” A cybernetic system only then possesses stability for blocking external and internal disturbances when it has sufficient internal diversity[6].” V.I.Vernadski says “Living matter is a form of activated matter activated with a typical energy and this energy being greater the greater the mass of the living matter.” Biologists,immediately after the discovery of chromosomes were so excited that they all thought that the solution of all mysteries of living systems are in their possession. Ruthmore mentioned that ‘nearly all tests that so far have been devised show that the two tinny spirals of matter determine the form and structure of all life ,its functioning ,its colour, its variety and its continuity [Those tinny coils are RNA and DNA] [7].’But until now,in the language of life sciences “we cannot define exactly what is life;we can almost describe observable phenomena that collectively distinguish between living and nonliving matter [2]: These are 1) Respiration ,2) Irritability ,3) Movement 4) Excretion ,5)Reproduction ,6) Nutrition ,7) Growth . Though the language of science is a kind of language yet the searching for an intrinsic unity in the innumerable varieties of various entities respect the truth of science. As is the sayings of Jacob Brunowskii [8] “For science is a language and like a language it defines its parts by the way that make up a meaning it is the internal unity and coherence of science which gives the truth.” Yet another quote from Francois Jacob [5] “the notion of recombinant DNA is tied to the mysteries and the supernatural. We are formidable mixtures of nucleic acid and memory of desire and proteins. The century that is ending has been preoccupied with nucleic acids and proteins. The next one will concentrate on memory and desire. Will it

14

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 be able to answer the question they pose? In que of the above quote of Prof. Jacob Prof. Lo Kajisek [9] says ‘It is evident that any biological system (all animals and human beings ) being itself autonomous consists of a series of autonomous subsystems that evolve under proper rules. With the activity of many subsystems tending to a common final goal there is a hierarchy of different autonomous subsystems. Individual subsystems or the structure of proper causal chain a holistic view in studying the properties of a whole system that is, both the different aspects should be applied to when we wish to understand the functioning of living subjects.” Some specially featuring characteristics can certainly be observed with the observation of main features of living systems[10].In his famous essay in Bengali language ‘Swamijir Hindu Dharma Bhasan ebong Adhunik Bijnan’(Swamiji’s Lecture on Hindu Religion and Modern Science ‘) Prof.Biswa Ranjan Nag says ‘We cannot but admit that all living bodies inherit some characteristics as ancestor’s successor.’ Prof.Roger Penrose states in his famous book ‘Shadows of the Mind’ ‘Human behavior is incomputable[11].Detailed arguments concerning the mathematical nature of whatever physics might underlies conclude that the activity of our brains can have no real relevance to our understanding of the action of human mind.’ We all know that we can perceive the virtues like kindness, affection, sympathy, piety, regards , reverence, generosity ..etc. These are the entities that we can perceive but cannot measure. Instinct , which is a proven characteristic feature of all beings of animate nature from extreme inferior to supreme superior can even not be measured. One cannot do without mentioning some enjoyable interesting facts about stimulation of plant-kingdom which may be relevant here. Many years ago the Indian National Metro Channel was neither a private channel nor a purely news-channel. At that time a very very attractive TV-programme could be seen twice a week named ‘Paranormal World of MCcenna’. In that programme Mr.MCcenna used to show before an open audience as well as TV-audience an unedited ,unmodified video clips of one or more happenings that are to some extent mysterious, uncommon , apparently yet unexplained or partly understandable funny things which occur at any place on the globe. In one such programme Mr.MCcenna had been showing how trees and plants respond to a physiologically sensitive stimuli for human beings which was actually a part of a research project. We all know that Prof.Jagadish Chandra Bose invented Crescograph through which he proved that plant-kingdom belongs to category of animate nature. However in the programme showed by MCcenna a research- team had been shown to arrange for an experiment within deep interior of a forest.The members chose a large tree and clipped two leaves of it which were far apart from each other with the help of two metal-clips and those clips were connected through conducting wire to computerized digital monitoring system. The monitoring system had been monitoring the immediate response of the tree

15

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 to a human psychological stimulus, such as a sound of sorrowful play or song. One could astonishingly see that the CRO-like mechanical process of developing line-graph showed a gradual decrease i,e. a negative slope from an initial value and the response of the same tree, as observed in the same process to a joyful- merrymaking play-acting was exactly the opposite i,e. gradually increasing or a positive slope from the same initial value. Such a monitoring system was engineered especially with the help of a very sensitive electronic device to interact very delicately with even slightest as well as weakest possible signature of stimulation. With the audio-visual presentation of expression of human sorrow and human joy separately there were induced certainly stimulations within the branches and stems all through of it which after being transformed into a type of electrical signal were observable through oscilloscopic screen and it clearly revealed the opposite nature of influences of sorrow and joy respectively. Of course this result does not prove that trees and plants have ‘minds’ too. Yet a close correspondence and more objectively a covariation between human emotion and stimulative sensitivity of plants and trees is certainly realizable. In an interview with renowned calcuttan Professor Nrisingha Prasad Bhaduri in Kolkata (formerly known as Calcutta) legendary nonresidential Indian Professor Dr. Jitendra Nath Moahnty [12] said that according to the western philosophers the subject ‘physics’ is a standard model; Any other subject is deficient compared to ‘physics’. How much potential belongs to a subject is adjudged by comparing its significance with that of ‘physics’. With this ‘Physics’ in the background while analyzing relative significance of the ‘Force’ and the ‘ Energy’ in the realm of science Nobel Laureate Prof.Leon N Kooper said “Force of first kind (which is actually the muscular force of beings of animate nature) does not necessarily obey the Newton’s laws of motion while the force of second kind (which is material and mechanical force) cannot do without obeying Newton’s laws[13].” Yet another Nobel Laureate Erwin Schroedinger wrote[14],”Every scientist know how difficult it is to remember a moderately extended group facts before at least some primitive theoretical picture about them has been shaped………Consciousness finds itself intimately connected with and dependent on the physical state of a limited region of matter ’the body’.” He wrote also that “An organism’s astonishing gift of concentrating a stream of order on itself and thus escaping the decay into atomic chaos of drinking orderliness from suitable environment seems to be connected with the presence of the aperiodic solids the chromosome-molecules which doubtlessly represent the highest degree of well-ordered atomic association we know of……..much higher than the periodic crystal…….. If ‘D’ represents the disorderliness then from statistical physics we write Entropy = ln While we write orderliness () the orderliness(O) represents a negative entropy,

16

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

ln = ln( ) = − Entropy …….that means living organisms maintain its high level of orderliness as well as low level of entropy.” Schroedinger actually wanted to draw people’s attention to the fact that insides living cells full of uncountable varieties there exists an almost unimaginable orderliness. Prof. David Bohm , who is the root of another revolution in the field of post-Bell Quantum Field theory ,decoherence and non-locality said that[15] “The essential new quality implied by the quantum theory in non-locality i,e. a system cannot be analyzed whose basic properties do not depend upon the whole system……this leads to new notion of unbroken wholeness of the universe.” In the perspective of the very classification made on the basis of conventional scientific concepts discussed in the prelude section of this article the difference between living and no-living entities can be recognized as vivid manifestation of distinction between the consciousness and unconsciousness. A handful of top learned person try sometimes seriously to find a legitimate answer to the mostly asked question of the terrestrial civilization ‘how did the consciousness as well as conscious entities come from the yet-known world of unconscious inert entities?’Emergence of consciousness thus took place step by step from the science of unconscious matter. Among the prominent a few scientists who, trying to solve some deep-rooted subtle mysteries of quantum theory have discovered new horizons in the post-quantum physics David Bohm is one about whom is said by Michael Talbot [15] ‘Perhaps the most intriguing aspect of Bohm’s theory is how it might apply to our understanding of the human mind. Bohm believes that such a mind-boggling interconnectedness might even shed light on the phenomenon of consciousness itself.”As also according to Prof. Bernard Espagent[16] “The doctrine that the world is made up of objects whose existence is independent of human consciousness turns out to be in conflict with quantum mechanics and with facts established by experiment.” On the other hand M.V.Lakajisek [9] said that”On consciousness the uncertainty principle is validated.” Albert Einstein said that there must be some kind of hidden variable which is responsible for this uncertainty. Albert said that the hidden variable which has not been found is definitely consciousness and its cosmic consciousness. A large number of physicists including Neils Bohr have validated the hidden variable which is responsible for the uncertainty. It is supreme consciousness. Max Planck, the originator of the great “Quantum Theory”said ,” I regard consciousness as fundamental. I regard matter as derivative of consciousness.We cannot get behind consciousness. Everything that we talk about that we regard as existing postulates consciousness.” This means that ‘entity’ protracts consciousness. Most recently groups of scientists all over the world,especially in some advanced countries such as America, England have been, in collaboration with a number of medical scientists aspiring to 17

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 search for ‘soul’ and ‘consciousness’ through a series of out-of- body experiment. In the book ‘Life after death’ by Hindu monk Swami Abhedananda (of Swami Vivekananda’s Ramakrishna’s order) the author had mentioned about ‘ectoplasm’ hypothesized by Prof. Crook to be a very peculiar entity that may be regarded as a missing link between matter and energy and to come out of a body with the medical death of the body. Prof.David Jones have , in relation to the search for soul , devised a complex instrument for measuring the mass of ‘soul’(hypothesized to delink from a body after its death) the theoretical and descriptive details of which had been published in the ‘Nature’,1993,2nd December issue. Scientists of today have almost established the possibility of quantum teleportation and some researchers have reported to have become successful in teleporting an electron. Teleportation is very much relevant to the consideration of ‘soul’ or ‘spirit’. In another instance scientist Rupert Sheldrake reinforced the concept of fifth dimension postulated by Prof. Bernet and have also tried to establish its acceptance in the world of intelligent beings. He gave a conspicuous name ‘eternity’ to this new dimension and this new dimension is presumed to embed the much cared, much adored ‘4-dimension’ of rigorous scientific endeavour. And this 4-dimension is the space-time continuum which the matter-energy combine enticed in[17]. Prof. David Bohm has said in regard to the Sheldrake’s theory ,based on subject-object-omniject relationship “Sheldrake’s morphogenetic field is located in a particular body, is connected with a universal field. Such a field would not be located anywhere …..when the explicated order enfold into the implicate order which does not have any space; all spaces and all times are , we might say merged so that what happens in one place will interpenetrate with what happens in another place.” Prof. G. Wald said [9] ‘ …..so that is the problem of mind consciousness a vast uncharitable domain that includes all sciences yet the science cannot deal with , has no way of approaching , not even to identify its presence or absence that offers nothing to measure and nothing to locate since it has no location.’ The scientifically determining(?) characteristic features of living world ,especially of animal kingdom that have so far been discussed in this article have become more apparent; That very characteristic features are “Mind- Consciousness-Complex”. As we know not of any mass- less charge (as a particle), energy-less matter is as a far-away imagination, as is the ‘space intrinsically wrapped with time (Theory of Relativity)’ similarly a living being cannot be without consciousness. Benedict Spinoza wrote [18] “Nee corpus mentem ad cogitandum , nee mens corpus ad motum , neque ad quietem , nee aliquid (siquid est ) aliquid determinare neque ad quietem , nee ad aliquid (siquid est) aliud determinare potest “- meaning as the physical body cannot direct the’ mind’ to think so the mind cannot keep the body at rest or move it or do anything like that. Philosopher Prof. J.N.Mohanty says ‘With connectionist’s

18

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 emergentism of global from local in the background a temporal flow of consciousness no matter what the specific contents are, can be conjectured. Emergence of consciousness is first in lived body (lieb) with its interaction with the world as also its withdrawal and dissociation from the environment both at once. Once consciousness emerges nothing is ever the same. Ex-H.O.D. of Biochemistry Prof.J.J.Ghosh had mentioned in one of his research paper that the basic idea of consciousness can be broadly classified into two sections [9]; (i) Holistic , (ii) Dualistic . The ‘Holistic’ section includes ‘Eastern Philosophy in great details , Upanishads , Samkhyas, and the doctrine that ‘Atman is one and the same as Brahmman’. The ‘Dualistic’ section includes ‘Western Philosophy’ which stems from a contoured confluence of materialistic perceptions of a group of predate-Philosophers like Plato, Kant ,Locke , Aristotle , Descartes.According to this school of thought substance of ‘Mind’ is different from substance of ‘Brain’ or any other physical organs or matters. According to Prof.Ghosh ,in ‘Upanishads’ and in ‘Samkhyas’ ‘Individual Consciousness’ is identified as ‘Atman’ whereas pervasive ‘Global Consciousness’ is identified as ‘Brahmman’. ‘Sarbam Khalwidam Brahmma’, originally in Sanskrit language means ‘Everything in this Universe is the integral part of Brahmman’. Swami Vivekananda, once in his lecture in NewYork said ‘Though an atom is invisible , unthinkable yet in it is the real power and potency of the Universe. That is what the Vedantists say of ‘Atman’. Again in the words of Erwin Schrödinger [15] “ This life of yours which you are living is not merely a piece of this experience but in certain sense the ‘whole’….This as we know ,is what the Brahmins express in that sacred mystic formula ‘TAT TWAM ASI’ ..This is you or again in such words as ‘I am in the east,I am in the west ,I am below and above ,I am this whole world.” Swami Vivekananda further rejuvenated the basic ideas Adi Sankaracharya . He said that the idea that ‘God’ has been transformed into ‘Nature’ by the influence of the holy truth-trinity of ‘Space, Time and Causation’ is only apparent truth because immutable one cannot be mutable. Swamiji explained ‘Nasadya shuktam’ of Rig Veda in a newer perspective[15]. “Anidabaatam Swadhya Tadekam Tasmat Dhyanan Na Pra Kim Cha Naas.’ The ‘Prana’ existed then but there was no motion in it. ‘Anidabaatam’ means existed without vibration.Then when ‘Kalpa’ begins after immense interval the ‘Anidabaatam’ commences to vibrate and blow after blow is given by ‘Prana’ to ‘Akasha’. The atoms become condensed and as they are condensed different elements are formed. According to the literature of ‘Kathoponishads’ whichever we observe in this Universe are all due to the vibration of ‘Prana’. Swami Ranganathanandaji wrote [9]’Vedanta says by the light of this science of consciousness the three energy- sources in every human beings ‘muscle-power(bahubalam), ‘intellectual power (buddhibalam)’, and ‘spiritual power (Atmabalam)’’. He wrote that our true

19

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 nature is ‘Satcidananda’ meaning ‘sat – existence satta-the entity’, ‘cit – citta – knowledge or consciousness, ‘ananda – bliss’. He also mentioned that ‘form’ is the ‘seen’ ,’eye’ is the ‘seer’, that eye is the seer the seen then is the ‘mind’, the modifications of the mind are the ‘seen’, the ‘saksi’ the external witness ‘self’,the ‘Atman’ is the seer only and never the seen.’ As to quote from the sayings of Shrimat Adi Sankaracharya [19] ‘Creation, persistence and destruction these three types of happenings had been going on in this world eternally.On one part material-entities are being created in newer form and continuously being evolved again in a newer form. On the other part they persist in a state of equilibrium or of a quasiequillibrium. And on yet another part they are being annihilated. Therefore it should be said that the very sequential evolution caused this world to be created, evolved and transformed has neither a stop nor a discontinuity.That is eternal ,is happening and shall be happening for ever. Theosophically the fundamental nature of inert matter are of seven kinds; 1) Mahatatwa(Universal self or Brahmman), 2)Ahamtatwa (Local or personal self or Atman) ,3)Byom’ the celestial sphere, 4) ‘Marut’ the Air or Atmosphere 5) Teja – the Fire or Temperature, 6)’Apa the Water , (7) Kshiti’ (the soil or the ground).The first three are beyond our sense- organs. A secret Doctrine of remote past age of learned persons reads as ,’According is science , the holy creative trinity are ‘inert matter ,senseless force ,and blind chance.” According to the ‘spiritual science’ the states of the Universe are two in number ; ‘Byaktam’(the explorable) and ‘Abyaktam’( the implorable). Creation or production is explorable while annihilation is an implorable state. In the explorable state of Universe ‘Brahmman’ has two forms ; ‘Sukshma (the subtle that is the ‘spirit’) and the ‘Sthula’ ( the gross that is the ‘matter ‘).Great Western Philosopher Herbert Spencer wrote [19],’Ultimate mystery continues as great as ever the problem of existence is not solved. It is simply removed further back…..Nay indeed far from making the Universe less mystery than before make it a greater mystery .Let us conclude with the slokas from ‘Pranoponishad’ ‘praNoreba JyeSThasca ,ShreSTasca praNashyedang bashe sarbam tridibe yat pratiSThitam I mateba putran rakshaswa shreeSca praJnam ca biDhehi nA iti II ‘( in Sanskrit language) Meaning The Earth, The Air , The Sky Entities that exist in either of these three world (Lokas) persist to be in the hold of “Prana’( The Life); Hey ‘Prana’, as a mother protects her sons by her affection please protect us like that , give us ‘Shree’(Material wealth) and ‘Prajna’(Intellectual and spiritual wealth).

20

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

References:

1. Fowler , W.A. (1956) ’The Origin of Elements’ Scientific American,September,1956,Vol.195 No.3 2. Taylor, D.J. ,Green,N.P.O., Stout, G.W.( 1997 )’Bilogical Sciences’Editor- R.Soper,CambridgeUniv.Press 3. Hoyle, Fred, Wicramsinghe,C.(1983)’Evolution from Space’ A PaladinBook,Granada,London, NewYork 4. Jones, Sir Harold Spencer (1959) ‘Life on The Other Worlds’ELBS & University Press Ltd. 5. Jacob,Francois (1999) ’Of Flies,Mice and Men’University Press 6. Lapo A.V.(1982 )’Traces of Bygone Biosphere’,Mir Publisher 7. Ruthmore, R(1965)’The Coil of Life’A dell Book,Students’ Edition 8. Bronowskii,Jacob(1960)’The Common Sense of Science’A Pelican Book,Penguin Books Publishers 9. ’Proceedings of the Conference on Philosophy and Science: An Explanatory Approach to Consciousness,(2003)Ramakrishna Mission Institute of Culture,Golpark,Kolkata. India 10. Nag ,Prof.Biswa Ranjan (1995)’Swamijir Hindu Dharma Bhasan ebong Adhunik Bijnan(Swamiji’s lecture on Hindu Religion and Modern Science)(In Bengali Udbodhon,February,1995 11. Penrose , Roger(1995) ‘Shadows of the Mind’Vintage Publications, 12. Bhaduri, Prof.Nrisingha Prasad (1996) ‘Interview with Prof.Jitendra Mohanty’ (in Bengali) Desh(AP Pub.) 13. Kooper,Leon N (1968)’An Introduction to the Meaning and Structure of Physics’Harper InternationalEdn. 14. Schrödinger,Erwin (1998)’What is Life’Canto, Cambridge University Press 15. Jitamananda,Swami (2004 )’Modern Physics and Vedanta’Bharatiya Vidya Bhavana 16. Espagnet,Bernard d’,(1992) ‘On Consciousness’ – Scientific American,September ,1992 17. Sheldrake ,Rupert (2009) ’A New Science of Life’ Paladin Book, London 18. Spinoza, Benedict(1883) ‘Ethics’-Part-III,Proposition-2 19. Sankaracharya, Adi (1949) ’Baijnanik Hindu Dharma’(in Bengali)( Scientific Hindu Religion)

21

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

ASPIRATION OF SECONDARY SCHOOL STUDENTS

Dr. K. V. Jeeva Rathina V. Kaliswari Research Guide Research Scholar Department of Education Department of Education Karpagam Academy of Higher Karpagam Academy of Higher Education, CBE Education, CBE

Abstract Aspiration is the main thing for human performance. It helps to reach the goal in a desirable way. Conversely, looking up to one’s “aspiration” will find as its origins are similar to the words “spirit power” and “inspiration”. It’s taken from the Latin word “aspire” which means “to breathe upon.” It conveys the meaning “to breathe life into” or “panting with desire.” Aspirations are emotional feeling and inspirational one. Most of the people’s view Goals and Aspirations have similar qualities, but they are completely varied. The etymology of the word “goal” comes from the Old English which means obstacle or boundary, and is related to the word which is “to hinder”. The typical meaning of the word goal is to challenge to overcome all the obstacles. The individual inspired by the feeling of aspiring to achieve his goals. It deals with “What” to achieve in his life. Goal gives the opportunity to achieve an aspiration in a specific way. Keywords Aspiration, Gender, Type of School, Location, Type of Family, Medium of study, Income of the Family, Father’s Education, Mother’s Education, Father’s Occupation and Mother’s Occupation.

INTRODUCTION

Aspirations can be defined as a pupil's capacity to recognize and think high for the future. It is the feeling of inspire in the present to fulfil the dreams of the future. This construct of aspirations has two major underpinnings: inspiration and ambitions. Inspiration revealed by an individual who does their work with joyful and cheerful. It was found that the activity of an individual is fully with awareness about his future goal and also it seems as an instinct feeling. Level of Aspiration is determined by their activities usefulness. Ambitions which mean a strong desire of an individual to do in their future or determine something to achieve in their life. The ambition of the individual is fulfilled by their aspiration which leads them to success in all their desire to

22

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 have a bright future. This is a systematic method of each student’s aspiration level, important to set their ambitions in present and future. There is a definition- aspiration is the index of ambition and inspiration by means of behavioural traits. Hence, they must be motivated to have good desires which will lead them towards his progressive life. By the help of the school, students can achieve their educational goals by their aspirations as well as ambitions.

THE REVIEW OF LITERATURE

Liyaqat Bashir and Ramandeep Kaur (2017) aimed to study in Inter -relation of Educational Aspiration with School Environment of Secondary School Students. There is no significant difference seen in the locality of the students in secondary school in their aspiration level of education. S. M. Shahidul1, A. H. M. Zehadul Karim1 & S. Mustari ( 2016) made an attempt to analysis the Social Capital and Educational Aspiration of Students: Students’ educational aspiration becomes higher when a favourable condition exists in the family. Hence the parents’ highest level of socioeconomic status is associated with higher family, social capital, which in turn enhances the level of educational aspiration of students. Utpal Kalita (2014) made a s t u d y to examine the relationship of occupational aspiration with their school facilities for students in secondary school. The research results revealed that the efforts to improve school facilities may indeed have educational and occupational benefits. Debasmita Paul (2013) aimed at exploring the occupational aspiration of youth. The study focused on key determinants of young people’s subsequent professional choice, level of qualification and future planning. The study implied that students having concrete knowledge about their career are less frustrated and more energetic for better adjustment. They try to extend their ability to achieve their target career. From all the reviews, the aspiration influence by various variables like sex, emotional intelligence, social intelligence, achievement, personality, mode of education, social -finance condition so on. In Survey, educational studies show that no proper approaches are made to create an inventory to find out the adjustment capacity of school pupils. Children and youngsters aspiration levels have been highly avoided all over India. As a result of this aspect, present studies have been taken in secondary school students to find out their aspiration level. Hence, the Investigator paid her attention at aspiration level of the secondary school students.

23

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM

The statement of the problem was selected for the preceding study is “Aspiration of Secondary School Students”.

OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY

To find out the aspiration of students in secondary school with respect of the variables like Gender, Type of school management, Location, Family Type, Medium of study, Income of the Family, Father’s Education, Mother’s Education, Father’s Occupation and Mother’s Occupation.

AIM OF THE RESEARCH

 To study the level of aspiration of the students in secondary school.

HYPOTHESIS OF THE STUDY

1. There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their sex. 2. There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their type of school management. 3. There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their locality. 4. There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their family type. 5. There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their medium of instruction. 6. There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their family income. 7. There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their father’s education. 8. There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their mother’s education. 9. There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their father’s occupation 10. There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their mother’s occupation.

24

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

DELIMITATIONS OF THE STUDY

 The research is limited into 200 secondary school students  The research is limited to Coimbatore Educational District only

METHOD OF STUDY For the present study, the investigator used survey method.

SAMPLE AND SAMPLING The investigator used random sampling and select 200 secondary school students in Coimbatore Educational District.

TOOLS USED FOR THE STUDY To find out the student’s level of aspiration the investigator used a standardized tool constructed by Dr. M. A. Shah and Dr. Mahesh Bhargava on 1987 – “Manual for Level of Aspiration Measure”. The researcher detects the aspiration level based on the Goal Discrepancy Score (GDS).

GOAL DISCREPANCY SCORE (GDS) The extent and direction of the difference between the actual score on the past trial and the goal set up of the next trial are known as the Goal Discrepancy Score (G.D.S), which is derived by subtracting the expected score on a trial with actual score on immediate past trial. Thus, in other words, the goal discrepancy score is the difference between the aspiration for the next trial (expected score) with the immediate performance of the past trial. According to Frank (1935) this goal discrepancy score is one of the personality’s permanent characteristics. A positive goal discrepancy score suggests that one’s aim, is higher, in relation to one’s past performance and a negative goal discrepancy score indicates that one’s aim is lower than one’s past performance. It means if expected score on the next trial is more than the actual score on the past trial, the GDS is termed as positive, whereas if it is less than the immediate previous performance the GDS will be considered as negative. The size of the discrepancy shows how high or low one sets the goal relative to his performance. The general tendency must set the goal a little higher than the past performance (i.e., positive goal discrepancy score). If the score differences are consistently positive (or expected score is more than the actual score) it indicates that the subject seldom attains the goal he sets for himself and we might say that he or she is over aspirant expects more and does less or he may be called idealistic. If the score differences are consistently negative (or the expected score is less than the actual score) it indicates that the

25

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 subject does better than he says and we might call him as under aspirant- does more and expects less. Goal Discrepancy Score may also be interpreted in terms of ego- involvements. If the goal is set up seriously by the subject and if he really expects to make that score, then it might be said that the subject is ego-involved and if he fails to achieve that score, he is not ego- involved and below his self- esteem. STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES USED The investigator used the following calculations to check out the aspiration level of students in secondary school, i.e., Mean, Standard Deviation, ‘t’values and ‘F’values were calculated. DATA ANALYSIS Hypothesis 1: There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their sex. Table 1 Variable No. of students Mean S.D t -value Male 96 1.05 3.50 Female 104 1.29 4.16 0.440 NS

Interpretation: Above table shows, the calculated t-value 0.440 is not statistically significant at the level of 0.05. Thus the hypothesis, “There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their sex” is accepted. Gender does not influence the aspiration level of the secondary school students.

Hypothesis 2: There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their type of school management. Table 2 Variable No. of Mean S.D F -value students Government 75 0.79 4.02 Aided 21 3.64 3.04 5.057** S Private 104 0.96 3.72 **-Significant at the level of 0.01 Interpretation: Above table shows, the calculated F-value 5.057 is statistically significant at the level of 0.01. Thus the hypothesis, “There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with

26

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 reference of their type of school management” is rejected. Type of the school influences the aspiration level of the secondary school students.

Hypothesis 3: There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their locality. Table 3 Variable No. of students Mean S.D t –value Rural 74 1.03 4.17 Urban 126 1.26 3.66 0.402 NS

Interpretation: Above table shows, the calculated t-value is not statistically significant at the level of 0.05. Thus the hypothesis, “There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their locality” is accepted. Location does not influence the aspiration level of the secondary school students.

Hypothesis 4: There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their family type. Table 4 Variable No. of students Mean S.D t –value Nuclear Family 117 1.19 4.11 Joint Family 83 1.16 3.48 0.063 NS

Interpretation: Above table shows, the calculated t-value is not statistically significant at the level of 0.05. Thus the hypothesis, “There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their family type” is accepted. Type of family does not influence the aspiration level of the secondary school students.

Hypothesis 5: There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their medium of instruction. Table 5 Variable No. of Mean S.D t -value students Tamil medium 62 0.44 4.29 English 138 1.51 3.60 1.837 NS medium

27

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Interpretation: Above table shows, the calculated t-value is not statistically significant at the level of 0.05. Thus the hypothesis, “There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their medium of instruction.” is accepted. Medium of instruction does not influence the aspiration level of the secondary school students.

Hypothesis 6: There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their family income. Table 6 Variable No. of students Mean S.D t -value Below Poverty 73 0.80 3.99 line 1.039 NS Above Poverty 127 1.39 3.76 line

Interpretation: Above table shows, the calculated t-value is not statistically significant at the level of 0.05. Thus the hypothesis, “There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their family income” is accepted. Family income does not influence the aspiration level of the secondary school students.

Hypothesis 7 There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their father’s education. Table 7 Variable No. of Mean S.D F -value students Primary 48 1.36 3.22 Secondary 62 0.50 4.06 Higher 51 1.44 3.90 2.531* Secondary College 33 2.37 3.26 Illiterate 6 -2.12 6.43 *-Significant at the level of 0.05 Interpretation: Above table shows, the calculated F-value is statistically significant at the level of 0.05. Thus the hypothesis, “There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their

28

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 father’s education” is rejected. Father’s educational qualification does influence the aspiration level of the secondary school students.

Hypothesis 8 There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their mother’s education. Table 8 Variable No. of Mean S.D F -value students Primary 46 0.55 3.97 Secondary 75 1.85 3.11 Higher 51 0.64 4.55 1.432 NS Secondary College 21 1.81 3.06 Illiterate 7 0.07 6.02 Interpretation: Above table shows, the calculated F-value is not statistically significant at the level of 0.01. Thus the hypothesis, “There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their mother’s education” is accepted. Mother’s educational qualification does not influence the aspiration level of the secondary school students.

Hypothesis 9 There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their father’s occupation Table 9 Variable No. of Mean S.D F -value students Business 89 0.94 4.14 Government 23 2.03 3.97 Private 62 1.81 3.18 2.356 NS Daily Wages 26 -0.29 3.87

Interpretation: Above table shows, the calculated F-value is not statistically significant at the level of 0.05. Thus the hypothesis, “There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their father’s occupation” is accepted. Father’s occupation does not influence the aspiration level of the secondary school students.

29

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Hypothesis 10 There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their mother’s occupation. Table 10 Variable No. of Mean S.D F -value students Homemaker 28 2.48 2.67 Business 29 0.89 4.87 2.923* Government 21 1.79 3.24 Private 51 1.89 3.30 Daily Wages 71 0.09 4.09 *-Significant at the level of 0.05 Interpretation: Above table shows, the calculated F-value is not statistically significant at the level of 0.05. Thus the hypothesis, “There is no significant difference between aspiration levels of students in secondary school with reference of their mother’s occupation” is rejected. Mother’s occupation does influence the aspiration level of the secondary school students.

FINDINGS 1. Gender does not influence the aspiration level of secondary school students. 2. Type of school management influences the aspiration level of secondary school students. 3. Location does not influence the aspiration level of secondary school students. 4. Type of family does not influence the aspiration level of secondary school students. 5. Medium of instruction does not influence the aspiration level of secondary school students. 6. Family income does not influence the aspiration level of secondary school students. 7. Father’s education qualification does influence the aspiration level of secondary school students. 8. Mother’s education qualification does not influence the aspiration level of the secondary school students. 9. Father’s occupation does not influence the aspiration level of the secondary school students. 10. Mother’s occupation does influence the aspiration level of students in secondary school.

30

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

CONCLUSION

School management type, Education of father and Occupation of mother does influence the aspiration level of students in secondary school. The students who are studying in Aided schools have high aspiration comparing to Government and Private school students. The students whose fathers were completed the collegiate education have a very good level of aspiration when compared to Primary, Secondary, Higher Secondary and Illiterate fathers. The students whose mothers are homemakers have a high aspiration level compared to working mothers. The variables like gender, locality, Type of family, Medium of instruction, Family income, Education of mother and Occupation of father does not influence the aspiration level of the secondary school students.

REFERENCES

1) Ansari, G.A. Level of Aspiration as a dimension of personality N.Delhi, Manasayan, 1976 2) Bhargava, M and Dhir, Preeti: A Comparative examination of need patterns of aspirant girls within realistic and non realistic zones Perspectives in Psychological Researches. 1980, 3(1) 25-28. 3) Utpal Kalita (2014) the occupational aspiration of secondary school students in relation to their school facilities.

31

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

MICRO FINANCE THROUGH JOINT LIABILITY GROUPS (JLGS) IN INDIA

Sri Yeddala Narasimhulu Prof.S.V Subba Reddy Research Scholar Professor of Commerce DDE. Department of Commerce Sri Venkateswara University Sri Venkateswara University Tirupati,Andhra Pradesh Tirupati, Andhra Pradesh

Abstract Micro finance is a source of financial services for those entrepreneurs and small businesses who lack access to banking and related services. It is banking the un-bankables and bringing credit, saving and other essential financial services within the reach of millions of people. It is mainly for those who are too poor to be served by regular banks, in most cases because they are unable to offer sufficient collateral. There are two most prominent modes of delivering microfinance in India, which are ‘Conventional Weaker Section lending by Banks’ and ‘Financing through Micro Finance Institutions’. A Joint Liability Group is usually a group of five to ten who come together to borrow from an MFI. The members in a Joint liability groups are also from similar socio- economic backgrounds and usually the same village. A Joint liability group is different from Self-help groups in that the members share liability, or stand guarantee for each other. If any of the group members default, the other members need to pool in money to repay the MFI. This ensures a greater effort on part of the group members to ensure that everyone repays, thus ensuring resulting in better accountability and security for the MFI involved.

Key Words: Joint Liability Groups (JLG),SHG, Micro-Finance, Financial Services and India.

1.0 INTRODUCTION Poverty is one of the major problems in India. It is the root cause of many socio-economic problems including population explosion, child labour and unemployment, and rising graph of crimes. Poverty alleviation should be the main target of the nation so as to make it a prosperous, affluent and developed country. Thus, poverty elimination is a matter of fundamental importance and poverty implies a condition in which a person finds him unable to maintain a living standard adequate for his physical and mental efficiency. He even fails to meet his basic needs. Poverty is in fact a relative concept. It is very difficult to draw a demarcation line between wealth and poverty. 32

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

According to Adam Smith, “Man is rich or poor according to the degree in which he can afford to enjoy the necessaries, the conveniences and the amusements of human life.” Poor people can save the money and want to save the money, and when they do not save the money, it is because of lack of opportunity rather than lack of capacity. During their lives there are many seasonal occasions when they need sums of cash greater than they have to hand, and the only reliable way of getting hold of such lump sums is by finding some way to build them from their own savings. They need these of lump sums to meet their lifecycle requirements, to cope with emergencies, and to grasp opportunities to acquire assets or develop their businesses. The job of financial services for the poor, then, is to provide them with good mechanisms to turn savings into lump sums for a wide range of variety of uses (and not just to run micro enterprises). Good financial services for the poor are those that who do this job in the safest, most flexible most convenient and most affordable way. Microfinance is one such financial service offered mainly with an aim to help such poor people who suffer from financial problems at present. The micro finance revolution, a recent product of development to ensures the availability of institutional credit of finance and financial inclusion to the poor, who were so for excluded from the institutional credit system of finance. Microcredit has become a popular anti-poverty policy in the last decades in India. Now with more than 150 million borrowers, microcredit has assuredly increased access to formal financial services for the poor.

1.1 Microfinance – A Brief History Microfinance is the provision of financial services to low-income group clients or solidarity lending groups including consumers and the self-employed, who traditionally lack access to banking and related services. Microfinance sector has grown rapidly over the past few decades in the country. Nobel Laureate Muhammad Yunus is credited with laying the foundation of the modern micro fiancé institutions (MFIs) with establishment of Grameen Bank, Bangladesh in 1976. Today it has evolved into a vibrant industry exhibiting a variety of business models in micro finance sector. Microfinance Institutions MFIs in India exist as NGOs (registered as trust or societies), Section 25 of companies and Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs). Commercial Banks and Regional Rural Banks(RRBs), cooperative societies and other large lenders have played an important role in providing refinance facility to micro finance institutions. Banks have also leveraged the (SHGs) Self-Help Group channel to provide direct credit to group borrowers. With financial inclusion emerging as a major policy objective in the country, Microfinance (MF) has occupied center stage as a promising conduit

33

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 for extending financial services to unbanked sections of population in the country. At the same time, practices followed by certain lenders have subjected the sector to greater scrutiny and need for stricter regulations.

1.2 Salient Features of Microfinance  Borrowers are from the low income group  Loans are of small amount – micro loans  Short duration loans  Loans are offered without collaterals  High frequency of repayment  Loans are generally taken for income generation purpose

2.0 OBJECTIVE OF THE STUDY The following specific objective has set for the present study:  To review the Micro Finance through JLGs in India

3.0 MICROFINANCE IN INDIA Although the microfinance sector is having a healthy growth rate, there have been a number of concerns related to the micro finance sector, like grey areas in regulation, transparent pricing, low financial literacy etc. In addition to these concerns there are a few emerging concerns like insufficient funds, cluster formation, multiple lending and over-indebtedness which are arising because of the increasing competition among the Micro finance institutions (MFIs). On a national level there has been a String of actions taken to strengthen the regulation of MFIs sector including, enactment of microfinance regulation bill by the Government of Andhra Pradesh, implementation of sector-specific regulation by Reserve Bank of India and most recently, release of Draft Microfinance Institutions (MFIs) (development and regulation) Bill, 2011 for comments. Based on the research work, a few major recommendations made in the report include field supervision of MFIs to check ground realities and the operational efficiency of such micro finance institutions. Offer incentives to MFIs for opening branches in unbanked rural areas and villages, so as to increase rural penetration. Also Micro finance institutions (MFIs) are encouraged to offer complete range of products to their clients. Transparent pricing and technology implementation to maintain uniformity and efficiency are among the others which these institutions should adopt the financial mechanism. Inability of MFIs in getting sufficient funds is a major drawback in the microfinance growth and so these institutions should look for alternative sources of funds. Some of the alternative fund sources include outside equity investment, portfolio buyouts and securitization of loans which only a few large MF institutions are currently availing.

34

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

3.1 Micro Finance and Poverty In developing economies and particularly in rural villages, many activities that would be classified in the developed world as financial are not monetized: that is, money is not used to carry them out. This is often the case when people need the services money can provide but do not have dispensable funds required for those services or activities, forcing them to revert to other means of acquiring them. The advocates of micro credit argue that micro credit can help to substantially reduce poverty in rural areas. In his recent book, Stuart Rutherford cites several types of needs:- → Lifecycle Needs: such as weddings, funerals, childbirth, education, homebuilding, widowhood and old age etc. → Personal Emergencies: such as sickness, injury, unemployment, theft, harassment or death. → Disasters: such as fires, cyclones floods, and man-made events like war or bulldozing of dwellings. → Investment Opportunities: expanding a business, buying land and buildings or equipment, improving housing, securing a job (which often requires paying a large bribe), etc. Poor people find creative and often collaborative ways to meet these basic requirements, primarily through creating and exchanging different forms of non-cash value. Common substitutes for cash vary from country to country, but typically include livestock, grains, silver, jewelry and precious metals. Marguerite S Robinson in 1980s demonstrated that "Microfinance could provide large-scale outreach profitably," and in the 1990s, "Microfinance began to develop as an industry". In the 2000s, the microfinance industry's objective is to satisfy the unmet demand on a much larger scale, and to play a role in reducing poverty. While much progress has been made in developing a applicable, commercial microfinance sector in the last few decades, several issues remain that need to be addressed before the industry will be able to satisfy massive worldwide demand. The obstacles or challenges to building a sound commercial microfinance industry include the following below:  Inappropriate donor subsidies  Poor regulation and supervision of deposit-taking MFIs  Few MFIs that meet the needs for savings, remittances or insurance  Limited management capacity in MFIs  Institutional inefficiencies  Need for more dissemination and adoption of rural, agricultural microfinance methodologies

35

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

3.2 Microfinance Institutions and the Urban and Rural Poor According to the latest research done by the World Bank (WB), India is home to almost one third of the world’s poor (surviving on an equivalent of one dollar a day). Though many central government and state government poverty alleviation programs are currently very active in India, microfinance plays a major contributor role to financial inclusion. In the past few decades, it has played out remarkably in eradicating poverty. Reports show that people who have taken microfinance have been able to increase their income and hence the standard life cycle. About half of the Indian population still doesn’t have a savings bank account and they are deprived of all banking services in India. Poor also need financial services to fulfil their basic needs like consumption, building of assets and protection against risk. Microfinance is not just about giving micro credit to the poor rather it is an economic development tool whose objective is to assist poor to work their way out of poverty. It covers a large wide range of services like credit, remittance, savings, insurance and also non-financial services like training, counselling etc. Microfinance institutions (MFIs) serve as a supplement to banks and in some sense a better one too. These institutions not only offer micro credit but they also provide other financial services like savings, remittance insurance, and non-financial services like individual training, counselling, and support to start their own business and the most importantly in a convenient way. The borrower’s receive all these services at her or his door step and in most cases with a repayment schedule of borrower’s convenience. But all this comes at a cost and the interest rates charged by these MF institutions are higher than commercial banks and vary widely from 10 to 30 percent. Some claim that the interest rates charged by some of these MF institutions are very high while others feel that considering the cost of capital and the cost incurred in giving the service, the high rate of interest are justified.

4.0 GROUP-BASED CREDIT Group- based credit or solidarity lending is a common practice in micro- finance. Rather than lending to individuals, Micro finance institutions (MFIs) usually lend to small groups of people, who come together to borrow money and ensure timely repayment of the loan. This group-based approach has many advantages and more people tend to come forward and take a loan when they are part of a group. Also, peer pressure ensures that every member should be in the group repays. From the lending institutions point of view, lending to groups usually proves more cost-effective, since the cost associated with each loan is reduced by lending to groups. Also, usually there is no need of collateral if the loan is made to groups. The main two forms of group-based credit are:-

36

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

1. Self-Help Groups (SHGs) Self-Help Group refers to a group of 10-20 people who come from similar socio-economic backgrounds for various development of programmes or to solve common problems. Such groups are recognized by the governments and banks and can open bank accounts in the name of the SHG. These groups tend to be autonomous and tend to involve themselves in various socio-economic activities, including social causes. So, if a group of fifteen women in a village would like to apply for a loan start a small enterprise selling bags, bangles and cushions, they would be considered an SHG. These Self-help groups (SHGs,) by way of enterprise tend to create more employment opportunities and inspire others to get involved in small enterprises as well. 2. Joint Liability Groups (JLGs) A Joint Liability Group is usually a group of five to ten who come together to borrow loan from an MFI. The members in a JLG are also from similar socio-economic backgrounds and usually in the same village. A Joint liability group (JLG) is different from Self-help group (SHG) in that the members share liability, or stand guarantee for each other. If any of the members default, the other members need to pool in money to repay the micro finance institutions (MFIs). This ensures a greater effort on part of the members to ensure that everyone should repays, thus ensuring resulting in better accountability, responsibility and security for the MFI involved.

5.0 JOINT LIABILITY GROUPS (JLGs) Each and every year the group members who want to borrow for seasonal production costs sign a contract in which they accept liability not only for their own individual loans, but even also for the loans borrowed by other members of their group and hence the term 'joint-liability'. A primary requirement for joint-liability security for Bank loans is that the farmers concerned, form themselves into groups of people who know and trust each other. These groups may vary in size from a minimum of 4 to a maximum of 10 farmers depending on the need of requirement and circumstances. The loans are made by the bank to individual farmers or to the group collectively. The amounts borrowed by each person depend on his/ her individual requirements, subject to a maximum of certain prescribed amount in the policy (say Rs.50,000) which can be borrowed with this form of security. The joint liability groups (JLGs) should necessarily comprise the farmers or entrepreneurs (undertaking production of the same crops or group of crops or undertaking non-farm activities to ensure cohesive functioning and facilitate procurement of inputs, processing, marketing,

37

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 etc.) All the members of the JLG should be residing in the same village, compact area and not drawn from different or distant places. Size of the JLG:- The group should be formed preferably with 4 to 10 members (up to 20 members) to enable the group members to offer mutual guarantee. Formation of JLGs:- Banks may initially form JLGs by using their own staff wherever feasible. Banks may also engage the business facilitators like NGOs, individual rural volunteers and other social workers to assist banks in promoting the concept of JLG and formation of groups. Departments of State Government like Agriculture Department also could form JLGs of tenant farmers and small farmers not having clear land title. The JLGs of such eligible farmers can also serve as a facilitating common access to market information, conduit for technology transfer; for training and technology dissemination in activities like soil testing, training, health camps, other socio economic programmes and assessing input requirements.

5.1 Main Features → To augment flow of credit to tenant farmers cultivating land either as oral lessees or sharecroppers and small farmers who do not have proper title of their land holding, through formation and financing of JLGs. → To extend collateral free loans to targeted clients, including rural micro entrepreneurs through JLGs. → To build mutual trust and confidence between banks, tenant farmers and entrepreneurs, etc.

5.1.1 General features of JLG A Joint Liability Group (JLG) is an informal group comprising of 4-10 individuals coming together for the purpose of availing loan from bank on individual basis or through group mechanism against mutual guarantee. Generally, the members of JLGs would engage in a similar type of economic activity in the Agriculture and Allied Sector. The members would offer a joint liability undertaking to the bank that enables them to avail loans. JLG members are expected to provide support to each other in carrying out occupational and socio-economic activities.

5.1.2 Criteria for membership Members should belong to similar socio-economic status of same conditions, background and environment carrying out farming and Allied activities and who agree to function as a joint liability group. This way the groups would be homogeneous and organized by likeminded farmers or Individuals and develop mutual trust and respect. The members should be

38

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 residing in the same village or area or neighbourhood area and should know and trust each other well enough to take up joint liability for group or individual loans. Members, who have defaulted to any other formal financial Institution or bank, in the past, are debarred from the group membership. More than one person from the same family should not be included in the same group.

5.1.3 Group Approach All members of the JLGs should be active enough to assume leadership of the group to ensure the activities of the JLG. The selection of an effective or able or active leader for the JLG is essential as this will ultimately benefit all the JLG members. The leader fosters a sense of unity, oversees and maintains discipline, shares information and facilitates repayments. For the bank, he is the focal point for all group activities. The JLG should hold regular meetings which must be attended by all the members regularly to discuss their issues of mutual interests. The principles of self – help group (SHG) strength need to be emphasized. Group cohesion has to be ensured. Adequate emphasis should be placed on the roles, expectations and functions of the group or members and the benefits of group dynamics. The JLG can easily serve as a facilitating common access to market information, conduit for technology transfer, for training and technology dissemination in activities like soil testing, training, socio-economic activities and assessing input requirements. The JLGs for specific nonfarm activity, Ex.. Production of handicrafts, other non-farm products may be federated at village or block level for development of the product. The JLGs in the clusters on their stabilization could come together in the form of cluster federation or producers' companies with a view to contributing the entire value chain and there by achieving economies of scale in production and marketing of the product. The JLGs and evolving joint liability groups structures are expected to build up empathy and understanding and create responsive lending mechanisms to greater interaction and interdependence between the members of JLGs.

5.1.4 Credit Assessment The JLGs would prepare a credit plan for its individual members and an aggregate of that is submitted to the banks. Banks may evaluate simple loan application for this purpose. The individual members of JLGs would be eligible for bank loan after the bank verifies the individual members of credentials.

5.1.5 Purposes of credit The finance to JLGs is expected to be a flexible credit product addressing the credit requirements of its members including crop production,

39

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 marketing consumption and other productive purposes. Banks may consider cash credit, short-term loans or term loans depending upon the purpose of loan.

5.2 JLG MODELS Banks can finance to JLGs by adopting any of the two models. Model A:– Financing Individuals in the Group Each member of the JLG should be provided an individual KCC account. The financing branch could assess the credit requirement, based on the crop to be cultivated, available cultivable land / activity to be undertaken and the credit absorption capacity of the individual. All members would be jointly executing the loan documents, making each one jointly and severally liable for repayment of all loans taken by all individuals belonging to the respective group. The mutual agreement needs to ensure consensus among all members about the amount of individual debt liability that will be created including liability created out of the individual KCC account. Any member opting out of group or joining the group will necessitate a new loan agreement, to be kept on record in the bank branch. Model B:– Financing the Group The JLG functions, operationally, as one borrowing unit. The group would be eligible for accessing one loan, which could be combined credit requirements of all its group members. The credit assessment of the group could be based on the micro enterprise or activity to be undertaken. All members would jointly execute the document and own the debt liability individually, jointly and severally. The mutual agreement needs to ensure consensus among all its group members about the amount of individual debt liability that will be created. Any change in the composition of the group, will lead to a new document being registered by the bank branch.

5.3 WHO CAN FORM JLGS?

Farmers Clubs, Farmers Associations, Panchayat Raj Institutions (PRIs), Krishi Vikas Kendras (KVKs), State Agriculture Universities (SAUs), Agriculture Technology Management Agency (ATMA), Bank branches, PACS, Business Facilitators, NGOs, other cooperatives, Govt. Depts., Producer Associations, Artisan Guilds, Department of SMEs, Small Scale industries / Agro industries, Individuals, Input dealers, and Document writers (in cooperative banks),MFIs or MFOs, etc.

40

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

5.4 SAVINGS

JLG members need to be encouraged to save the amount regularly. Branches may open savings account by the JLG or individual members of the JLG to ensure regular savings and thrift habit amongst them. However, the quantum of loan amount to be given to the groups should be related to the credit needs of the enterprise and not to the quantum of savings.

6.0 CONCLUSION

The concept of Joint Liability Groups (JLGs) came in to being during 2006 by the efforts of National Bank for Agriculture and Rural Development (NABARD). Among the regions in the country, southern region came first in all the three parameters in both the 2012 and 2013. In the case of southern region, the relative share of each region has fluctuated over the period. Tamilnadu ranked first in terms of groups promoted, aggregate loans disbursed and loans per group in both the years. A.P came second in almost all the variables during the two years. The crux of this group is the social capital existing within it. The concept of social capital highlights the value of social relations and the role of cooperation and confidence to get economic results. It refers to the process between the people which establishes network norms, social trust and facilitates co- ordination and co-operation for mutual the benefits. All 750 members from JLG have unanimously said that, their personal income has increased due to the increased profits of business. The volume of business has bigger due to the assured supply of funds in the form of loans from NBFC- MFIs. Since all the members have the same opinion regarding the increase in their personal income, ‘SHGs and JLGs both have contributed to socio-economic empowerment of poor people of men and women.

References 1. Daley-Harris, S. (2009). "State of the Microcredit Summit Campaign Report 2009." 2. http://crawford.anu.edu.au/acde/events/adew- 2013/papers/Shatragom,S_F1.pdf 3. http://www.microfinancegateway.org/gm/document- 1.9.26269/38962_file_16.pdf 4. http://milaap.org/blog/microfinance-101-part-3-group-based-credit-shg- and-jlg/ 5. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Microfinance

41

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

A DESCRIPTIVE SURVEY STUDY TO ASSESS ATTITUDE TOWARDS NURSING PROFESSION AND FUTURE INTENTION OF NURSING STUDENTS OF SELECTED NURSING COLLEGES OF VADODARA, GUJARAT

Hina Damor, Gamit Pritesh, Bariya Manisha, Borisagar Chhaya, Patel Dhinal1, Dr. Ravindra H.N.2, Asst. Pro. Ekta Patel3 1IIyear P.B.BSc. Nursing, Sumandeep Nursing College, Sumandeep Vidhyapeeth University,Vododara. 2Principal, Sumandeep Nursing College, Sumandeep Vidhyapeeth University, Vadodara. 3Assistant Professor, Sumandeep Nursing College, Sumandeep Vidhyapeeth University, Vadodara.

Abstract

Background of the study: Nursing is a health care profession, which is focused on the care of individuals, families, and communities. So they can attain maintain or recover optimum health. Nurses care for individuals of all ages and cultural backgrounds that are healthy and ill in a holistic manner based on the individuals physical, emotional, psychological, intellectual, social and spiritual needs. The profession of nursing is a respectable occupation where one toils day and night for the common people, which existed as a crude form in the times of Florence Nightingale. Objectives of the study: To find out the attitude of nursing students towards nursing profession. To identify future intention of nursing students. To find out association between attitudes of nursing students with selected demographic variables.To find out association between future intentions of nursing students with selected demographic variables. Material and method: The study is based on quantitative approach it consists of 4 steps: Identifying the objective of study, expanding the mean of attaining the objectives, collecting data, and analysing data. In this research study a descriptive survey design was used. It is helps in collecting data and analyzing data. The study conducted at Sumandeep Nursing College, Pipariya, Vadodara and Parul Institute of Nursing, Limda, Vadodara city. Result: The 2nd section Analysis of nursing student’s attitude towards nursing profession. The result reveals that 98% (147) have favourable attitude & 2% (3) have unfavourable attitude towards nursing profession. Discussion and conclusion: The study involved data collection using descriptive design with using non probability convenience sampling technique method. The size of sample was 150, and selection of the sample was done according to inclusion and exclusion criteria. According to demographic variable of course of study. Significant 0.05 level of significance.

Keywords: WHO, INC, CMC.

42

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

INTRODUCTION Nursing is a health care profession, which is focused on the care of individuals, families, and communities. So they can attain maintain or recover optimum health. Nurses care for individuals of all ages and cultural backgrounds that are healthy and ill in a holistic manner based on the individuals physical, emotional, psychological, intellectual, social and spiritual needs. The definition of a ‘Nurse’ can be understood as someone who cultivates and harbours’ certain traits of a person, generally a woman, deployed as the curator and caretaker of the ill. Nursing encompasses autonomous and collaborative care of individuals of all ages, families, groups and communities, sick or well and in all settings. Nursing includes promotion of health, prevention of illness and care of ill, disabled and dying people. Nursing is the protection, promotion and optimization of health and abilities: prevention of illness and injury; alleviation of suffering through the diagnosis and treatment of human responses and advocacy in health care for individuals, families, communities and population. Florence Nightingale (1820-1910) was one of the remarkable example of the profession Nursing, a lady with a perception and the beginner of this occupation. Hence, Nursing is undoubtedly a respectable profession in the world.

OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY 1) To find out the attitude of nursing students towards nursing profession. 2) To identify future intention of nursing students. 3) To find out association between attitude of nursing students with selected demographic variables. 4) To find out association between future intention of nursing students with selected demographic variables.

RESEARCH HYPOTHESIS:- H1: - There will be a significant association between attitude of nursing student and selected demographic variable. H2:- There will be a significant association between future intention of nursing students & selected demographic variables.

VARIABLE 1. Demographic variable: Age, Gender, Area of Domicile, Course of study, occupation of father and occupation of mother, religion Family member, engaged in nursing profession, ill health of family member.

RESEARCH SETTING Research setting is the place and location where the data is to be collected.

43

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

The study conducted at Sumandeep Nursing College, Pipariya, Vadodara and Parul Institute of Nursing, Limda, Vadodara city.

SAMPLE Sample is the subset of the units that compose the population. Sample is used in research when it is not feasible to study the whole population from which it is drawn. The process of sampling makes it possible to accept a generalize to the intended based on care full observation of variable within a relatively small proportion of population. Samples are 4th year B.sc nursing and 3rd year GNM nursing students of Sumandeep Nursing College and Parul Institute of Nursing.

SAMPLE SIZES The sample size 150 students of Sumandeep Nursing College and Parul Institute of Nursing.

SAMPLING TECHNIQUE The sample of the study will be selected by using non probability convenience sampling technique.

ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF DATA Section 1 - Analysis and interpretation of personal data samples such as age, gender, religion, area of living, course of study, occupation of father, occupation of mother, presence of family members/ relatives in nursing profession, presence of major health problem in family source of motivation to select nursing profession. Section 2 - Analysis and interpretation of attitude of Nursing Students towards nursing profession. Section 3 - Analysis and interpretation of future intension Nursing Students. Section 4 – Analysis and interpretation of association of attitude and selected demographic variables of nursing students. Section 5 – Analysis and interpretation of association of future intention and selected demographic variables of nursing students. Frequency and percentage wise distribution of samples based on demographic data. [N=150] Demographic data Variable Frequency Percentage

Age 21-25 years 150 100% Above 25 years 0 0% Gender Male 11 7.33% Female 139 92.67%

44

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Religion Hindu 137 91.33% Muslim 4 2.67% Christian 8 5.33% Others 1 0.67% Area of study Urban 104 69.33% Rural 46 30.67% Course of study B.sc(N) 76 50.67% GNM 74 49.33%

Occupation of father Cultivation 44 29.33%

Daily wage worker 8 5.33%

Government 54 36% employee Private employee 30 20%

Others 14 9.34% Occupation of mother Housewife 120 80% Government 12 8% employee Private employee 16 10.67% Cultivation 2 1.33% Presence of family Yes 75 50% members/relatives in nursing No 75 50% profession. Presence of major health Yes 15 10% problem in family. No 135 90% Self 95 63.33% Source of motivation to select to Parents 53 35.33% nursing profession. Other(specify) 2 1.34%

45

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Frequency and percentage distribution of nursing students’ attitude regarding nursing profession. [N=150] Strongly agree agree Uncertain disagree Strongly Statement Disagree

No % No % No % No % No % Do you think nursing 90 60% 46 30.67% 6 4% 6 4% 2 1.33% profession is dignified and respectful profession? Do you think nursing 18 12% 40 26.67% 25 16.67% 50 33.33% 17 11.33% profession is equal to other profession? Do you think that nursing 10 6.67% 13 8.67% 30 20% 58 38.67% 39 26% professions scope is limited to hospital only? Do you think nursing 48 32% 58 38.67% 19 12.67% 11 7.33% 14 9.33% profession is secure profession? Do you think nursing 10 6.67% 10 6.67% 10 6.67% 62 41.33% 57 38% profession is for female only? Do you think that nursing 93 62% 46 30.67% 7 4.67% 3 2% 1 0.67% profession gives opportunity to serve humanity?

Do you think nursing 43 28.67% 65 43.33% 21 14% 18 12% 3 2% profession is a job oriented profession? Do you think that nursing 50 33.33% 74 49.33% 19 12.67% 5 3.33% 2 1.33% profession gives opportunity for personal growth?

46

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Do you think that social 19 12.67% 41 27.33% 38 25.33% 44 29.33% 8 5.33% prejudice affects in selection of nursing profession? Do you think that nursing 45 30% 56 37.33% 34 22.67% 9 6% 6 4% is a caring profession with ethical standards?

Do you think nursing is a 14 9.33% 22 14.67% 19 12.67% 50 33.33% 45 30% slavery profession?

Distribution of samples according to attitude scores.

Attitude Score Frequency Percentage Favorable 30-60 147 98% Unfavorable Below – 30 3 2% Total 150 100%

47

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Frequency and percentage distribution regarding future intension of nursing students. [N=150] Sr. no Statement No Percentage 1 I want to go for higher studies. 52 34.67% 2 I want to go abroad. 32 21.33% 3 I want to work at hospital. 37 24.67%

4 I want to go for academic. 19 12.67%

5 I want to change my profession. 10 6.67%

6 I want ______other specify. 0 0%

48

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Association of the attitude score among students with their demographic variable.

SR. Variable Attitude X2 Df Level of

NO significance at 0.05 level

le le Favorable Unfavorab 1 Age 21-25 years 147 03 0.2422 1 3.84 Above 25 years 0 0 NS 2 Gender Male 11 0 0.24211 3 3.84 Female 136 3 NS 3 Religion Hindu 134 3 0.29047 1 7.82 Muslim 4 0 NS Christian 8 0 Others 1 0 4 Area of Living Urban 103 1 1.8657 1 3.84 Rural 44 2 NS 5 Course of Study B.sc(N) 73 3 3.9807 4 3.84 GNM 74 0 S 6 Occupation of Father Cultivation 42 0 3.72187 3 9.49 Daily wage 8 0 NS worker Government 54 0 employee Private 30 0

49

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

employee Others 13 1 7 Occupation of mother Housewife 118 2 2.89014 1 7.82 Government 11 1 NS employee Private 16 0 employee Cultivation 2 0 Other 0 0 8 Presence of family Yes 74 1 0.34014 1 3.84 members/relatives in NS nursing profession. No 73 2 9 Presence of major Yes 14 1 1.8514 1 3.84 health problem in No 133 2 NS family. 10 Source of motivation Self 93 2 0.04947 1 3.84 to select to nursing NS profession.

Parents 52 1 Other(specify) 2 0

50

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

The chi square is used to identify association between attitude and selected demographic variable. According to demographic variable of student’s course of study significant at 0.05 level of significance. According to demographic variable of student’s age, gender, religion, area of living, occupation of father and mother, presence of family members/relatives in nursing profession, presence of major health problem in family, source of motivation to select to nursing profession, Non-significant at 0.05 level of significance.H1 hypothesis is accepted partially accepted.

Association of the future intension score among students with their demographic variable.

Sr.no Variable Future intension X2 Df Level of

significant at 0.05 level

work profession Higher Higher studies Abroad Hospital side Academic Change 1 Age 21-25 52 32 37 19 10 0 5 11.07 years Above 25 0 0 0 0 0 NS years 2 Gender Male 2 4 4 1 0 3.76 5 11.07 Female 50 28 33 18 10 NS 3 Religion Hindu 42 19 34 17 12 25.70 15 24.99 Muslim 2 2 5 3 5 S Christian 0 0 3 5 4 Others 0 0 0 0 0 4 Area of Urban 35 19 29 15 12 8.13 5 11.07

51

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

living Rural 18 6 8 8 0 NS 5 Course of B.sc(N) 24 17 9 12 9 23.19 5 11.07 study GNM 28 5 28 17 1 S 6 Occupation Cultivatio 24 14 11 5 1 31.80 20 31.41 of father n S Daily 10 0 6 10 4 wage worker Governme 5 4 12 4 7 nt employee Private 5 3 7 7 0 employee Others 7 3 0 1 0 7 Occupation Housewif 25 10 30 14 8 29.50 20 31.41 of mother e NS Governme 16 10 2 4 6 nt employee Private 4 5 3 1 2 employee Cultivatio 7 0 2 0 1 n Other 0 0 0 0 0 8 Presence of Yes 24 9 20 9 7 3.071 5 11.07

52

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

family No 28 10 30 10 3 NS members/rel atives in nursing profession. 9 Presence of Yes 4 10 7 15 4 24.91 5 11.07 major health S problem in family.

No 48 12 30 14 6

10 Source of Self 30 10 18 13 4 12.50 10 18.31 motivation NS to select to nursing profession.

Parents 30 10 19 8 6 Other(spe 0 0 0 2 0 cify)

53

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

The chi square is used to identify association between future intention and selected demographic variable. According to demographic variable of student’s course of study, religion, occupation of father, presence of major health problem in family, significant at 0.05 level of significance. According to demographic variable of student’s age, gender, area of living, occupation of mother, presence of family members/relatives in nursing profession, source of motivation to select to nursing profession, Non-significant at 0.05 level of significance.H2 hypothesis is accepted partially.

Conclusion This study presents the conclusions drawn, implications, limitations, and delimitations and recommendations of the present study. The focus of this study was to evaluate “A descriptive survey study to assess attitude towards nursing profession and future intention of nursing students of selected nursing colleges of vadodara” The study was undertaken to assess the “A descriptive survey study to assess attitude towards nursing profession and future intention of nursing students of selected nursing colleges of Vadodara” The study involved data collection using descriptive design with using non probability convenience sampling technique method. The size of sample was 150.and selection of the sample was done according to inclusion and exclusion criteria. The data was interpreted by suitable and appropriate statistical method. This chapter deals with the following conclusions. 1. Majority of nursing student’s participants (18%) has positive attitude regarding nursing profession. 2. Majority (24.67%) students would like to work at hospitals. 3. The chi square is used to identify association between attitude and selected demographic variable. This is a association between attitude and course of study at 0.05 level of significance. 4. The chi square is used to identify association between future intention and selected demographic variable. This is an association between future intention and course of study, religion, occupation of father, presence of major health problem in family, significant at 0.05 level of significance. This concluded that, there is association between future intention and demographic variable.

Reference

1. Rosseter, R.( August 2012 ). “Media Relations/ Nursing Shortage”. American Association of college of Nursing. 2. https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org

54

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

3. Wilkinson, Alice. A brief history of Nursing in India and Pakistan, Delhi: Trained Nurses Association of India. 4. Neeraja KP. Text book of nursing education.2005.1stedn.Noida.jaypee brother’s medical publishers (p) Ltd. 5. poreddi V, Kondure RR, Math SB. Assessing the attitudes and perceptions towards nursing profession among nursing students. Nursing Journal of India.2012; 103 (1):6-8. 6. Definition of nursing by amrican association of nursing available at htt://www.nuersingworld.org/especially for you /What-is-nursing. 7. Keister J, Bakewell K, Meyer D. motivation factors in student’s choice of nursing as a career, journal of nursing education 1991;15(6):532-537. 8. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov>pubmed 9. Shinde, M, and mohite , V.R.,” A study to assess knowledge ,attitude and practices of five moments of hand hygiene among nursing staffs and students at a Tertiary Care Hospitaal at Karad”, International Journal of science and Research ,2014,Volume 3(2),Pp.311-321. 10. World Health Organization working together for health: the world health report WHO, Geneva (2006).

55

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

POLITICAL EMPOWERMENT OF WOMEN

Dr. R. Raghupathi Reddy Lecturer in Political Science Silver Jubilee Govt. College (A) Kurnool

"You can tell the condition of a nation by looking at the status of its women" - Jawaharlal Nehru

“No country can prosper if it ignores the prosper of women” - Swami Vivekananda.

Abstract

Empowerment is not only a vague term but also a much-contested term. Empowerment in its emancipatory meaning is a serious word, which brings up the question of personal agency, one that links action to needs, and one that results in making significant collective change. It is also a concept that does not merely concern personal identity but brings out a broader analysis of human rights and social justice. Women Empowerment refers to increasing and improving the social, economic and political strength of the women to make sure of the equal right to woman, and to make them confident enough to claim their rights. Despite of various researches, programs and policies of Government, international agreements, conferences, recommendations and passing of women reservation bill in Parliament, the participation of women in politics is still lacking behind and it is very low in comparison to men in India. We can see that women is empowered to some extent economically, socially, nutritionally as well as technology, but the pace of political empowerment is too low among them. Therefore, this is matter of great concern for our nation, why women are not giving their participation in politics and women should be involved in local as well as national decision-making bodies. The Prime Minister’s call for ‘beti bachao beti padhao’ aims to empower women.

Key Words: Empowerment, Women, Rights, Political, Participation, Decision making.

56

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

INTRODUCTION

The total population of females in India is 65.2 crore as compared to males which are 69.7 crore. Their contribution to the social and economic development of societies is also more than half as compared to that of men by virtue of their dual roles in the productive and reproductive spheres. The origin of the concept of empowerment goes back to the civil rights movements in the USA in the 1960. Gender equality could be achieved by strengthening women’s rights and addressing barriers to their political participation. Today gender inequality leads to deprivation of power among women. Women are perpetually excluded from decision-making at every step of the ladder, starting from the household to the top layer of policymaking. Although the Constitution of India attempts to remove gender inequalities by interdicting discrimination based on gender and class, and enshrining fundamental rights for all citizens, women still have only de jure rather than de facto access to these rights.

POLITICAL EMPOWERMENT OF WOMEN Politics is generally understood as an exercise of power. Political participation means involvement of people in the process of exercising power. Therefore, political empowerment is to invest with power, especially legal power or official authority. Participation in political sphere involves framing of policies and decisions and effective control over the implementation of the same. It implies political participation that includes the right to vote, contest, campaign, party membership and representation in political office at all levels and effectively influences decisions thereby leading to political empowerment. STATUS OF WOMEN IN PARLIAMENT At Global level: Share of Seat in Parliament HDI Rank Country (% Held by Women) 2017 1 Norway 41.4

2 Switzerland 29.3 3 Australia 32.7 130 India 11.6 168 Afghanistan 27.4

Source: Gender Inequality Index: HDI report (2017)

57

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

At National level: Women Presence in the Lok Sabha -

Source: Election Commission of India 2014 Women Presence in the Rajya Sabha-

Year Total Seats No of Women % of Women 1952 219 16 7.3 1957 237 18 7.6 1962 238 18 7.6 1967 240 20 8.3 1971 243 17 7.0 1977 244 25 10.2 1980 244 24 9.8 1985 244 28 11.0 1990 245 38 15.5 1996 223 20 9.0 1998 223 19 8.6 2004 245 27 11.1 2009 245 22 8.97 2014 245 29 11.3 Source: Election Commission of India (2014)

NEED OF POLITICAL EMPOWERMENT OF WOMEN

It is important to understand that overall development of a nation requires maximum utilization of human resources without any discrimination. A more developed society is a more participant one. So, the participation of women in the political process is a major step towards inclusive growth. Women are key components in many areas like family, society and

58

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

a nation. Therefore, positive impact on women ultimately brings positive impact toward their life and culture. A nation is nothing but the combination of people and it’s thought. If women become aware and empowered about their rights then ultimately positive effect will lead them to every sectors of a nation.

FACTORS HINDERING WOMEN’S POLITICAL PARTICIPATION

 Political Factors: The dominancy of males in political parties and political activities that restrict women’s participation in such activities. When it comes to national issues, the female always feel to be ignored because male members make decisions according to their perspectives.  Socio-Cultural Factors: Social-cultural factors are also important which effect women’s participation in public spheres. Women find it difficult to participate in politics due to the limited time available to them because of their dual roles in the productive and reproductive sphere. There is the gender-based segregation of space as public (masculine) and private (feminine).  Economic Factors: These days politics moves around money making and it has become commercialized. Women usually have less ownership on productive resources and capital, limiting their scope of political participation. Political processes have become expensive. The cost of election also put hindrance.  Psychological Factors: Psychological factors are also responsible for women’s low political participation. Generally, men are more psychologically involved in politics because they regard politics as their respective sphere, while women are generally unfortunate in these matters.  Threat to Safety of Women: Nussbaum (2005) state that in the larger society, violence and the threat of violence affects many women's ability to participate actively in many forms of social and political relationship, to speak in public, to be recognized as dignified beings whose worth is equal to that of others.

59

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

STRATEGIES FOR INCREASING PARTICIPATION OF WOMEN IN POLITICS

 Education: Education is the most powerful tool for development of human resource. As far back as the 3rd World conference on women in 1985, conveyed under the theme “equality, development and peace,” education was promoted as the basic tool that should be given to women in order to fulfil their roles as vital members of society. The female literacy in India is 65.46 % while of male it is 82.14 % (census 2011). It also provided a positive indication that growth in female literacy rates (11.8%) was substantially faster than in male literacy rates (6.9%) in the 2001–2011 decadal period, which means the gender gap appears to be narrowing.  Amendments in Indian Constitution: The main emphasis of Government is inclusion of more women in decision making and participation in policy formulation at all levels of political activities. Indian Government declared the year 2001 as a year of the empowerment of women. 33% reservation for women in Panchayats and urban local bodies are provided to all Indian women according to 73rd and 74thAmendments to the Indian constitution in 1992. The idea behind this move was to enable more women at the root level to enter in the political stream and create “Critical mass” of women leaders whose voices are heard at various levels. ROLE OF PRI IN WOMEN’S POLITICAL EMPOWERMENT

PRI has brought about significant transformations in the lives of women themselves, who have become empowered, and have gained self- confidence, political awareness, and affirmation of their own identity. Participation of women in PRI’s involves women as voters, women as members of political parties, women as candidates, women as elected members of PRI’s taking part in decision-making, planning, implementation and evaluation of programs, women as members of Mahila Mandals and their association with various organizations. Male family members and other members of the Panchayat itself actively prevented women from participating in Panchayat activities.

60

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

ROLE OF EXTENSION EDUCATION IN POLITICAL EMPOWERMENT

 Use of media as a tool for Empowerment: There should be radio program in local dialect which must be broadcasted every day or a once week which can have themes like the role of Panchayats, its working and its goals etc. Social media can play a significant role to provide knowledge about rights and duties of women. Social networking sites and mobile app can be a good source for them to sensitize about cruelties and barriers they are facing. Print and electronic media can prove to be an important factor in creating awareness in ruler society.  Exposure Visits: To motivate illiterate and unaware women, a visit should be conducted to places where women are performing outstandingly in politics. Successful working women Sarpanch can be a source of encouragement.  Women Organization: Women should be encouraged to organize themselves through Mahila Mandal and Self-help groups. Government should provide financial aid to those groups who are successfully working and encouraging women representation in the political arena.  Incentives: Women who are successfully leading political parties should be honored and encourage them by publishing their leadership qualities in public meetings. It would definitely motivate all women who were present at that time.  Trainings at Grass Root and National Level: Training programs should be organized at the village and national level by extension personnel’s for creating awareness among women why they need to participate in decision-making process, what are their rights, how can they come out of their socio-cultural barriers. These training can also induce better communication and leadership skills among them.  Creation of Awareness: Political awareness is the stepping-stone of political participation. Awareness creates interests and interest creates involvements. Women have very poor awareness regarding the electoral process of the Gram Panchayats, it can be created by an organization of rallies and nukad nataks in villages. CONCLUSION

The women empowerment has become one of the most important

61

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 concerns of 21st century in not only national level but also at the global world. Government policies are failure to balance of the gender equality. Society must take initiative to create a climate in which there is no gender discrimination and women have full opportunities of self-decision making and participating in social, political and economic life of the county with a sense of equality. Although India is moving towards development side, still it has a very low representation of women in politics. Therefore, extension education can play a major role in achieving gender equality by strengthening women’s rights and addressing barriers to their political participation. Women should be involved in local as well as nation decision making bodies for the overall development of a nation. The issue of gender-based violence and provision of safety and security of women should also be addressed on a priority basis to promote gender equality in the social and political arenas. The goal of women empowerment will not be accomplished by reservation alone. To expedite and speed up this process it is essential to implement supplementary policies, which encourage the self-confidence of women and build capabilities. References

1. Batliwala, S. (2007). Taking the Power out of Empowerment: An Experiential Account. Development in Practice, Vol. 17, No. 4/5. 2. Buch, N. (1998). State Welfare Policy and Women, 1950-1975. Economic and Political Weekly, Vol. 33, No. 17, pp. WS18- WS20. 3. Chandra, S., & Shree, M. (2011). Women’s Rights and Citizenship: Tracing State Perspectives in Early Post Independent India. Women’s Link, 17(3), pp- 6-14. 4. Census (2011). Government of India, censusindia.gov.in/. 5. Hust, E. (2005). Women’s Political Representation and Empowerment in India — A Million Indiras Now? New Delhi, Manohar Publishers & Distributors. 6. Artatrana G (2013) Political Participation of Women in Gram Panchayat Elections in Odisha. Int. J of Hum and Soc. Sci. 2:38-46. 7. Chawla M (2010) Gender Justice and Law in India. Pp. 25-27. Deep & Deep publications, New Delhi.

62

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

BLENDED LEARNING - AN INNOVATIVE PROGRAMME IN TEACHING AND LEARNING

Dr. Indu Dahiya Assistant Professor B.Ed. College of Leelavati Munshi College of Education K.G.Marg New Delhi Affiliated to I.P. University Dwarka, New Delhi

Abstract

Meeting diverse needs of students has always remained a challenge for teachers. Teachers have to struggle to provide for gifted, average and below average students in a regular face to face class room situation. To remedy this difficult situation, blended learning, which is one of the modern innovative methods, provides a viable solution. Blended learning is an education programme that combines on-line digital media with traditional class room methods. The specificity of this programme is that the students can direct their learning in accordance with their own time, place, path, or pace, using an adaptive technology, that is, using computers as interactive teaching and learning devices. Examples of such devices are instant messages, email, chat rooms, on-line forums, flipped class rooms, etc. Blended learning is also sometimes used as personalised Learning or differentiated learning. Blended learning can be used in many different and unique ways, generally using a combination of one or more of different models of blended learning. Some of these models of blended learning are: Face to face driver model, Rotation model, Flex model, Lab model etc. In all these models the powers of the teachers is combined with power of technology, which helps students reach their full potential and achieve their academic goals. There are certain unique benefits brought about by blended learning. These benefits are: 1) It brings efficiency to the entire process of teaching and learning. 2) It saves money by allowing students to use their own electronic. devices. 3) It personalises education by allowing students to work on their pace, path or place, or time.

Key concepts: Blended Learning, Personalized Learning, Hybrid Learning, Differentiated Learning, Models of Blended Learning.

63

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Introduction

Teaching in the classroom and classroom-management require methods which can facilitate learning and maintain orderliness in the classroom. Blended learning is one of such latest modalities. This modality incorporates the best aspects of both face-to- face (F 2 F ) and online instruction.

The term "blended learning" is being presently used increasingly in academic circles. It is identified as one of the top trends to emerge in the knowledge delivery systems. It appears in many guises, yet each form has similar elements such as face to face delivery, online components etc"

Definitions of blended learning

Perusal of the literature on blended learning shows that there exists no single, universally acceptable definition of the term. Yet there are some definitions that are being indicated here to clarify this emerging concept. According to Wikipedia, "blended learning is an education programme (formal or non-formal) that combines online digital media with traditional classroom methods. It requires the physical presence of both teacher and student”. The combining of F 2 F modality in brick and mortar situation with computer mediated activities takes place with respect to both content and delivery. Blended learning has been described as a mode of teaching and learning that eliminates the time, place, and situational barriers. Blended learning is also sometimes used as personalised learning or differentiated learning/ instruction. It includes hybrid learning, technology mediated learning, web enhanced instruction, and mixed mode

64

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 instruction. All these terms refer to efforts to tailor education to meet the different needs of students.

According to Mind flash 2015, Blended learning is a term used to describe the way e- learning is being combined with traditional classroom methods and independent study to create new hybrid teaching methods. It is not just adding computer to classrooms. The term blended learning was initially vague, encompassing a wide variety of technologies and pedagogical methods. The term became more concrete with the publication of the first Hand Book of Blended Learning. by Bonk and Graham (2006). Graham (2006) defined blended learning systems as the learning systems that combine face-to-face instruction with computer mediated instruction, or e-learning. The critical part of the definition of blended learning is that it involves some element of student control over time' place, path, and/ or pace. Here control over time means: learning is no longer restricted to the school day or school year; Control over Place means : learning is no longer restricted to the walls of the class room; Control over path means: learning is no longer restricted to pedagogy used by the teacher; interactive and adaptive software allows students to learn ( in a method that is customised to their needs.);

Control over Place means: learning is no longer restricted to the pace of an entire classroom. It can be said that the blending of F2F and online materials varies depending on (1) the content, (2) the needs of students, and (3) the preferences of the teacher. Examples of blended learning In addition to traditional F 2 F instruction the teacher can (a) Put assessment /reviews online. (b) Initiate online discussion. (c) Create online computer labs. (d) Put reference materials on web" (e) Deliver pre-work online. (f) Access experts live online. (g) Use mentoring and coaching tools

For an instance, in an elementary school students attend four or five periods a day, with one or two of the week days spent in a learning lab where they work, for example, on Math or literacy problems advancing at their own pace.

However it should be born in mid that a consistent teacher presence is essential to the blending of online resources within class time to facilitate learning even within an online environment. The teacher should develop student centered

65

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 courses, not traditional lecture based classes. In addition he/she can organise online learning different activities like team projects to certain small groups of students. (Graham 2006).

MODELS OF BLENDED LEARNING / INSTRUCTION

The blended learning program can be one of the following four types, which are named Models of Blended learning. These are: (1) Rotation model (2) Flex Model (3) A La Carte Model (4) Enriched Virtual Model The rotation model is further sub- divided into Four types, which are (a) Station rotation (b ) Lab rotation (c) Flipped classroom (d) Individual rotation These are graphically represented as under:

66

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

ANALYSIS OF THE MODELS

(1) Rotation Model

Rotation model is one of the most common models in blended learning. This category includes any course or subject in which students rotate either on a fixed schedule or on teacher's direction- among learning modalities, at least one of which is online learning. The online may be used for remediation and/ or as a supplement. This can be represented by the following diagram.

(a) Station rotation: A course or a subject in which students rotate on a fixed schedule or at teacher's discretion between learning modalities, at least one of which is online learning. Other modalities might include small groups or full class instruction group projects, individual tutoring, and paper and pencil assignments. For such learning students may rotate within a classroom or a group of classrooms in a cyclic order.

(b) Lab rotation: This model is the same as station rotation except that students rotate to a computer lab for the online learning.

(C) Flipped classroom: A course or a subject in which students participate in online learnings off site in place of traditional homework and then attend the brick and mortar school for face- to- face teacher guided practice or projects. The primary delivery of content and instruction is online. Flipped classroom is an instructional strategy and a type of blended learning that reverses the traditional learning environment delivering instructional content often only outside the classroom. In a flipped classroom students watch online lectures and participate

67

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 in online discussions. Thus the instruction becomes a learner- cantered model. Online videos are used for this purpose to deliver the content outside the classroom. It may include activity learning, in-depth lab experiments, debate, speech presentations, project based learning etc.

(d) Individual rotation: A course or a subject in which each student has an individualised play list. In this model the students do not necessarily rote to every station. They rotate on the stations mentioned in their play list. This model allows students to rotate through stations, but on individual schedule, set by teachers.

(2) FLEX MODEL

A course or a subject in which online learning is the backbone of students' learning, even if it directs students to offer offline activities at times. Here students switch between learning modalities on a customized fluid schedule that uses online learning as its corner stone similar to rotation model. Learners will learn primarily by F 2 F on campus but every class is divided into online and offline component. The teacher is on site and students learn mostly on brick and mortar campus, except any homework assignments. The classroom teacher provides face-to-face support, which is flexible and need based. Such a support is provided through activities such as small group instruction, group projects, and individual tutoring. Some implementations have substantial face-to-face support whereas others have minimal support. For example, some flex modules may have regular teaching, whereas others may have very little face-to-face enrichment.

(3) A La Carte Model

A course or a subject that a student takes entirely online along with other subjects that the student is having at a brick and mortar school or learning centre. The teacher for the A La Carte course is the online teacher. Students may take A La Carte courses either on brick and mortar campus or off site. This differs from full time online learning because it is not a whole time school experience. In this model students may take some cours(s) A La Carte and other face to face at a brick and mortar school/campus.

(4) The Enriched Virtual Model

A course or a subject in which students have required number of face- to-face learning sessions with their teachers and then are free to complete their remaining course work remotely from the face-to- face teacher. The remaining

68

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 course work is done online, which is the backbone of their learning, when located remotely. The same person serves as both the online and face-to-face teacher. Some enriched virtual programmes begin as full time online schools and then developed blended programmes to provide students with brick and mortar school experiences. The enriched virtual model differs from flipped classroom because in the enriched virtual programme students meet face-to-face with their teachers every week day. It differs from fully online course because face-to- learning learning sessions are more than optimal office hours. Here learning is divided into online and offline components. However, students have not to come to the campus everyday.

ROLE OF THE TEACHER IN BLENDED LEARNING.

Blended learning was never conceived to replace the teacher. It rather shifts the teacher role from knowledge provider to a coach or a mentor. It does not mean that the teacher plays a passive role. Quite the contrary, the teacher can play even a more active role. Learning in blended modality has from teacher directed top- down to learner driven down- up enterprise. Blended learning provides appropriate balance between online instruction (which offers interactive, tech- based learning, individual pacing, keeping students engaged and motivated) and teacher led-instruction.

ADVANTAGES OF BLENDED LEARNING

A blog posted on Knowledge Wave by Jennifer Patterson mentions the following seven most important benefits of Blended learning.

(1) Flexibility: Blended learning provides a high level of flexibility in presenting the contents. The complex topics can be printed in a F2F learning while other topics can be made available online. With an online component one can increase flexibility and convenience.

(2) Effectiveness: Garrison and Kanuke conducted research on this aspect and concluded that blended learning has proven potential to enhance both effectiveness and efficiency of meaningful learning experiences.

(3) Efficiency: with a well-planned blended learning strategy one efficiently and quickly impart instruction or give training to a large number of students. With the digital and E books devices such as videos and recording the potential for re- use is huge.

69

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

(4) Cost effectiveness: Blended learning is highly cost effective by including more online options.

(5) Personalisation: Blended learning is also sometimes called personalised learning in the sense that in it very often the learner drives its own learning according to his/ her own interest’s talent, passions and aspirations. He/she actively plans, participates in the design of learning, identifies goals of his/ her learning and benchmarks as he progresses along the learning path.

(6) Extended reach: Almost always creating blended learning strategy reduces curriculum teaching time. By digitising the expertise of talented subject experts, you can reach more people with high quality content at extremely low cost. This enables knowledgeable teachers to offer more classes or create more training content on other themes.

(7) Covers all learning styles: Effective blending can cover different learning styles through a variety of mediums and techniques.

References:

1. Bonk, C.J. and Graham CR (2005). Hand book of blended learning : Global perspectives local design. Retrieved on Jan,2018. http://en.wikipidia.org 2. Carman, J.M.(2002). Blended learning design: Five key elements knowledge.net. Retrieved Dec.15,2017. http://archive.org 3. Dewar, Tammy and Wittington Dave (2004) Blended learning research. Retrieved Dec.20,2017 from http://www.calliopelearning.com 4. Graham, CR and Allens.S(2005). Retrieved from http://digitallearningnews.com 5. Graham,C.R, 2006. Blended learning System in C J Bank and C R Graham. The hand book of blended learning. Global perspective, local classroom Pfeiffer. 6. Garrison,D.R. and Kanuke,H.(2004): Blended learning. Incovering its transformative potential in higher Edu. The internet and higher education 7(2) 7. Singh, harven (2013) : Building effective blended learning programme. Educational Technology, Vol.43, No.6. Retrieved on Dec.,2017 from http://www.bookstore.com 8. Singh, H.(2003) Building effective blending learning programmes . Educational Technology Englewaad Chffs. N.J. 9. Schmidt. K (2002). Web enhanced classroom.J.of instructional technology. Volume 16 No.2 Retrieved on Jan.4,2018 from http://www.nat.org

70

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

10. Thorne, K.(2003). Blended learning: How to integrate online and traditional learning. London and Sterling.V.A 11. Wikipedia-http://Wikipedia.org>wiki>blended. Retrieved on 13/01/2018. 12. www.mindflash.com. Retrieved on 13/01/2018. 13. www.knowledgewave.com>blog>bene. Retrieved on 13/01/2018.

71

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

A CASE STUDY OF MUNICIPAL ADMINISTRATION W.R.T. TUNI MUNICIPALITY, E.G.DIST, A.P

Dr. B. Prabhakara Rao Dr. J. Pandu Rangarao Lecturer in Economics Lecturer in Commerce Govt.Degree College, Palakonda P.R. Govt College (A) Kakinada Srikakulam (Dist) East Godavari (Dist)

1.1: INTRODUCTION:

With the materialization of welfare administration, the concept of Municipal administration came into lime light. This led to the more interaction between citizens and the Municipal Administration. This interaction led to the high expectations of the citizens, by which the role and responsibility of these Municipal Administration increased in providing benchmarking services both obligatory and optimal functions to its citizens. The obligatory functions generally aimed at fulfilling the minimum basic needs in the field of Health, Education, Water Supply, Transportation, paved streets, amusements, drainage and sewage, electricity and sanitation, removal of garbage. On the other hand the optimal functions aim at improving the quality of people’s life by providing entertainment, through establishment of parks, gardens, maintenance of play grounds, stadium, recreational clubs, libraries cultural and art galleries city fenestration etc. Effective Municipal Administration is taken into consideration the equal and genuine distribution of these services among all areas both urban and slum. In addition to the above said services, people want simple, specific, and clear administrative procedures and practices. All these are possible with humane, courteous, and sympathetic behavior of municipal administrative employees. Despite of many challenges and shortfalls of finances, over control of political system, shortage of employees, Municipalities are facing lot of problems. With this analysis, an attempt was made by the researcher to understand the procedure of Municipal Administration at Tuni Municipality. Municipal Administration is a key word in which many people works for common objective under the management. The work of management is to take care of their employees’ welfare, to motivate them to strive for common goal. Employees’ job satisfaction is part of Municipal Administration, because Municipal Administration occupies a key place in the Indian economy. They conceived as powerful tools in the process of economic development from gross root levels.

72

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

In urban and local governments Municipal Corporation, enjoy great autonomy. In India, it is not hierarchical; it has own setup and formed through special statute of State legislature. During the 2016-17 budgets, the government of Andhra Pradesh allocated 4,729 crores to Municipal Administration and urban development which is 49.2% more than the previous budget (3,169 crores)1. As per the 2011 census, the total population of the 13 districts of bifurcated Andhra Pradesh state was 4.96 crore, of which 1.46 crore people are living in urban areas. The urban population density pe Sq. Km is 3,593. The urban literacy rate is 79.17%. This state has total 13 municipal corporations, 72 Municipalities in which this Tuni Municipality existed in East Godavari District2. The organizational set-up of ULBs are depicted in the following diagram including government machinery and elected representatives in the state. IHSDP – Integrated Housing and Slum Development Programme is part of Jawaharlal Nehru National Urban Renewal Mission which was launched by GoI in 2005. This IHSDP covers both VAMBAY – Valmiki Ambedkar Awas Yojana and NSDP National Slum Development Programme. The main objective of this programme is to improve the living conditions of Urban Slum Dwellers. This is intended to provide various adequate facilities like shelters, community infrastructure etc. The main objective of this programme is to attain holistic slum development with a healthy urban environment, also aimed at development of Economically Weaker Section (EWS). Development of community toilets, development of basic physical amenities such as water supply, storm water drains, widening and paving of streets and streetlights also covered by this programme. This programe had given priority for development of social amenities in pre -school education, adult education, and recreational activities. The funds under IHSDP are shared in the ratio of 80:20 by central and state governments.

Criteria for the Establishment of Municipalities

According to Sec.3 of Andhra Pradesh Municipalities Act, 1965, the Government of Andhra Pradesh is empowered to declare a local area as a Municipality with a population of not less than 25,000. Thus, the population is the criteria for declaring a local area as a Municipality. However, the State Government has classified the Municipalities into five grades on the basis of population and annual revenue.

73

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Table No. 1.1 Classification of Municipalities in Andhra Pradesh Municipalities Act of 1965

S.No. Grade Income limit 1 Selection Grade An annual income of Rs.80 lakhs and above 2 Special Grade An annual income of Rs.50 lakhs and above but less than Rs.80 lakhs 3 First Grade An annual income of more than Rs.30 lakhs but less than Rs.50 lakhs. 4 Second Grade An annual income of more than Rs.15 lakhs but less 5 Third grade An annual income not more that Rs. 15 Laksh

Source: Andhra Pradesh Year Book, 1990, p.165

1. Andhra Pradesh Budget Analysis 201617, PRS Legislative Research pp-3. 2. CDMA (2015), Commissioner and Director Municipal Administration and Andhra Pradesh at a Glance’ published by State Government.

The above table 2.1 would provide the basis of gradation of Municipalities under each grade in the State of Andhra Pradesh. the income limit mentioned in the above table from Selection Grade to Third Grade. The nature of the power of the State Government is very wide and discretionary in the case of constitution of Municipalities in the State. The constitution of Municipality inclusion or exclusion of any area is an administrative Act motivated by the policy of the administration. Therefore, no reasons need be given by the government.

Andhra Pradesh Municipalities Act of 1994

Further, the Municipalities Act, 1965 was amended by Act No. 17 of 1994 in conformity with the Indian Constitution (74th Amendment) Act, 1992 and a provision were made for the Constitution of transitional areas (Nagar Panchayats) and smaller urban areas (New Municipalities). According to the 1994 Act, the State Government classified the Municipalities in the State into six grades as given in Table 1.2

74

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

TABLE NO. 1.2: Classification of Municipalities in Andhra Pradesh in the year 1995 S.No. Grade Income limit 1 Narar Panchayats Upto Rs. One crore per annum 2 Third Grade Municipality Upt Rs. One crore per annum 3 Second Grade Municipality Between Rs. One crore to Rs. 2 crores per annum 4 First Grade Municipality Between Rs. 2 to 3 Crores per annum 5 Special Grade Municipality Between rs. 3 to 4 crores per annum 6 Selection Grade Muncipality Between Rs. 4 Crores and above per annum Source: Director of Municipal Administration, Hyderabad, G.O.Ms.No.32, M.A., Date: 03-02-1995.

1.2: OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY:

1. To examine the role of each department in discharging their services in Tuni Municipality. 2. To study the awareness of citizens about e-governance services provided by Tuni Municipality. 3. To analyze the physical performance of Tuni Municipality; 4. To study the adequacy of the services, 5. To study the citizens’ perceptions with regard to these services, 6. To examine the level of satisfaction of citizens regarding basic services;

1. 3: RESEARCH METHODOLOGY:

To carry out this research, the researcher adopted survey based methodology to arrive conclusion. The study related to Municipal Administration in Tuni Municipality. This study focused on satisfaction, working nature and environment, basic services, e-governance practices implemented by Tuni Municipality, and awareness levels of residents of sample area. The primary data was collected from Tuni Citizens and employees of Tuni Municipality. The researcher used both interview and questionnaire methods of data collection. A structured questionnaire is used to collect required data from both types of respondents. The secondary data sources are includes journals, government reports, Ph.D thesis, books, magazines, and e- sources. Various Audit reports, annual reports and budget estimations of Municipality were helped a lot in collecting

75

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 relevant supplementary data. The secondary information is also collected from web sites of Directorate of Municipal Administration, Directorate of Local Bodies Audit and Office of State Finance Commission, Andhra Pradesh. The data thus collected was analyzed after classification, coding, editing, and tabulation by using various and necessary statistical techniques, and interpreted to test the stated hypothesis.

Selection of the Sample:

The researcher intended to collect the primary data through two questionnaires, one questionnaire used to collect data from residents of Tuni Municipal Corporation area. The second questionnaire used to collect data from employees of the Tuni Municipal Corporation. It comprises of respondents in the selected town and various wards of Tuni Muncipal Corporation, East Godavari District. The Sample consists of 60 respondents.

SHOWS THE SAMPLE DISTRIBUTION:

S. Area Total No. of Respondents No Population From Each 30 x 18 53425 0.1% of the total 1 Ward 18 (as per 2011 population respondents census) 60 Total -- 60

Research method: The present study is mainly of opinion survey nature. This study based on primary data and information gathered from various secondary data sources. The information would present in tabular form, with proper graphical representation to make the readers more convenient to understand the subject. The primary data collected from both citizens and employees of Tuni Municipality. After proper analysis of the collected data, the researcher would test the stated hypothesis to arrive findings.

1.4: LIMITATIONS OF THE STUDY: The present study is not free from certain limitations, as it may not cover almost all aspects. 1. The present study is confined to Tuni Municipal area, including 30 wards, out of these boundaries this research work may not responsible. 2. This study is based on the opinions provided by the 540 respondents, there is a possibility of personal bias,

76

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

6. The findings and suggestions of the present study relating to the overall situation of personnel policies of Tuni Municipality, but not relevant to any particular individual.

1.5: REVIEW OF LITERATURE:

After selecting a research topic, one should focus on the depth of relevant subject. This is possible by reviewing relevant literature. Therefore, it is essential to researcher to study the extensive literature. With this primary objective, to understand various facets of the research problem and to identify various limitations, lot of literature reviewed to focus on the stated problem. A study report conducted by Center for Good Governance, Hyderabad (2007)33 studied the quality of services provided by the local governments to poor people. Most of the work conducted on the basis of secondary data conducted from ULBs. This work focused on to what extent BSUP funds utilized and allocated for eradication of poverty in India. D. Sundar Ram (2010)34 conducted survey on democratic environment that prevailed in Indian local and urban bodies to participate in decision-making by natives. As per the 74th Constitution Amendment Act of 1992, decentralization and democratization of local administration widely provide an opportunity for balanced and equitable development in society. He concluded that autonomy and devolution of powers to these local and urban bodies can make them effective. Raji. S. Vegh (2010)35 in his Ph.D work conducted a comparative study on Municipal Employees’ Job Satisfaction. This work done on 240 employees and found that lower salaries are making municipal employees inefficient. This work highlighted the employee’s motivation and job satisfaction as key factor to render good services to citizens. The researcher opinion-ed that both organizational factors and personal factors has great influence on employees satisfaction. S.L. Goel (2011)36 in his book expressed the concept of local government provide an opportunity to people to participate in governance. Ward committees are pivot of decentralization through which local participation is possible. His study found that many citizens are not aware of the ward committees. He suggested that awareness must be created among natives regarding many governance aspects. Mrs. Manisha A. Kumbar (2012)37 her research work conducted with an objective to know the awareness of the citizens towards, e-governance practices. In this modern Liberalization, Privatization and Globalization world, Puraseva, e-governance gained importance. She segregated the following e- governance practices: Satisfies more citizens, No need of Agents, Helpful

77

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 attitude of employees, Less time and effort to avail services, Ease of administration, Error free Transactions, Security of data is high, Good complaint handling, Adherence to citizen‟s charter, Paperless office, Less waiting time, Good location, Convenient time schedule, Lower cost to the Citizen, Less corruption, Greater transparency, Equal opportunity to all, More predictable Outcome, High Clarity and simplicity of processes and Single window system. She opinioned that the success e-governance based on four pillars viz., Technology, Service Providers, Users, & Satisfaction. As per her research, it came to know that many people are showing interest to use e-governance practices.

1.6: PROFILE OF TUNI MUNICIPALITY:

Tuni Town is located at 17’-25’ North latitude and 82’-33’ east longitude in the extreme northeast corner of the East Godavari District. The River Thandava flows by the Eastern Side of the Tuni Town. Forming a natural boundary between East Godavari and Visakhapatnam Districts. It is railhead on Madras – Howarah broad guage of Railway Line at distance of 98 KM south Waltair. It lies on the Chennai – Kolkatta National High Way – 5. It situated at distance of 65 KM north of Kakinada, the headquarters of East Godavari District. Tuni is a gateway for north coastal Andhra.

Tuni Municipality:

As per the Population Census 2011 data, following are some quick facts about Tuni Municipality.

TABLE NO.1.3: SHOWS THE POPULATION CASTE WISE:

Total Male Female Children 5,562 2,831 2,731 Literacy 77.4% 73.7% 65.2% Scheduled Caste 9,590 4,530 5,060 Scheduled Tribe 352 176 176 Illiterate 16,378 6,806 9,572 Source: Annual records of Tuni Municipality TABLE NO. 1.4: Shows Religion-wise Population - Tuni Religion Total Male Female Hindu 51,274 (95.97%) 24,874 26,400 Muslim 1,527 (2.86%) 767 760

78

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Christian 560 (1.05%) 247 313 Sikh 2 (0%) 0 2 Buddhist 1 (0%) 1 0 Jain 35 (0.07%) 19 16 Other Religion 1 (0%) 1 0 No Religion 25 (0.05%) 13 12 Specified Source: Annual records of Tuni Municipality Literacy Rate - Tuni The total literacy rate of Tuni was 77.4% in 2011 which is greater than average literacy rate 67.02% of Andhra Pradesh. Population-wise, out of total 37,047 literates, males were 19,116 while females were 17,931. In addition, the male literacy rate was 82.79% and the female literacy rate was 72.38% in Tuni. TABLE NO. 3.3: Shows LITERACY RATE – TUNI POPULATION:

Tuni Andhra Pradesh Female 72.38% 59.15% Male 82.79% 74.88% Total 77.4% 67.02% Out of 12 Municipalities in East Godavari District of Andhra Pradesh, Tuni Municipality occupy 5th place as per population. This Tuni Municipality constituted as Grade – III Municipality on 1 November 1959. This recognized as Grade- II on 2 April 1980. Total Area of the TM is 7.02 Kms, the total number of population living under this preview is 53,425 as per 2011 census. The male population is 25,922 members and 27,503 female populations are living in this Municipal Corporation. There are 9027 residential building and 1354 non- residential buildings and 14,457 households in this town. Tuni is able to export 250 varieties of mangos; it is also a trade centre for betel leavel, jute bags, and cashew nuts and so on. It has a Sugar Factory which is run under co-operative sector named Thandava Sugars. There are many industries like Handloom industries, pharmaceuticals, and more than ten chemical industries. In this area there is a scope for economic development. This Municipality contains 30 wards, and total identified houses / families are 14,439. Total slums identified and notified is 31 in which total 26,714 populations is living. The rate of literacy in TM is 77.40%, it is higher than state average of 67.02%. The rate of Literacy for Male is 82.79% and female is 72.38%. . In this Municipality, there is one Government Hospital with 50 beds capacity, one urban health center. There are 2 municipal high schools, and 17 primary schools. Number of burial grounds four in number. There are two vegetable markets, it is a trading center, and Agricultural Market Yard 79

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 established in 1971. This municipality contains total 29 shopping complexes in which total 611 shops were constructed and let for business, through this the TM getting rents regularly. With seven rooms’ capacity, TM has one Library to serve the people, which maintained by Zilla Grandhalaya Samsta. TM constructed five community halls for the benefit of citizens. TM maintaining three municipal parks in their jurisdiction. While coming to the infrastructure, total nine Protected Water Supply reservoirs with a capacity of 5.15 MLD; comes under the TM. Total number of House Service Connections (Taps) reached 4440 out of this, there are 1074 Connections under BPL. Number of Public Stand posts available is 342. This Municipality is maintaining total 27.280 Kms length of water pipe lines in good condition. Still there is a 10 percent of un-served area to provide the water supply. Number of power bores this municipality contains is 13, apart from the 216 hand bores. While coming to the water utilization, the per capita supply of water to each citizen is 100 LPCD. The total water supplied to the public is ground water. This Tuni Municipality contains total CC Roads of 39.937 Kms, and BT roads & Metal Roads total contains 43.235 Kms, other roads length of 2.158 Kms. All together TM has 91.130 Kms and 2.800 Kms of R&B Roads, 3.000 Kms of National Highway. Still there is a 10% roads still remained as un-served. Total length of drains TM has is total 109.72 Kms, in which Masonry Drains length 55.200 Kms, Katcha Drains 43.520 Kms and Storm Water Drains length of 11.000 Kms. Lighting facility provided to entire Municipal Area except 5%. There are 21 (double Arm) Centre Lights, SV Lams (150 W + 250 W) 275 and 1487 Tube lights were fitted and maintained for the purpose of good illumination. The average garbage generated per day is 65 MTs , the sanitation department is lifting everyday this 65MTs Garbage. Total 13,821 houses contains sanitary toilets, 59 members have insanitary toilets, and 343 houholds have no toilets. Recently the TM constructed 343 toilets under Swatch Bharath Mission. 275 households connected to community toilets. Aadhar seeding position in Tuni MunicipalityArea is like this. The total number of assessments 10,441, total seeded to aadhar 10,381 yet to seed 60 members This chapter designed to highlight the some of the important Findings of the research study, and suggestions to improve the Municipal Administration in selected municipality along with suitable conclusion. This chapter divided into four parts, 1. Findings, 2. Testing of Hypothesis, 3. Suggestions and 4. Conclusions.

80

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

1.7: FINDINGS OF THE STUDY:

1. Most of the respondents belong to the age group of 35 – 45 years. 2. Most of the respondents in this area completed school education, some people are discontinuing their education at intermediate level. 3. Most of the respondents are married therefore they have families and their observation towards municipal administration is genuine and they have direct and continuous interaction with performance of municipal staff. 4. It is found that 26 percent of the respondents are hailed from agriculture and allied activities; here there is still scope for agriculture development. It is also found that the Tuni Municipality is exporter of Mangoes, Cashew Nuts. 5. It is found that more than 90 percent of this area are living more than five years. The migration percentage of this area is quite low. Many people are doing jobs in near by Visakhapatnam, but they are doing daily service by road transport. So, there is no need to migrate for employment by Tuni Municipal citizens. 6. It is found that the satisfaction levels of citizens towards their ward councilors are around 80 percent. Availability of the counselors is low, and their relationship with all citizens is not up to the mark. 7. It is found that 1/3rd of Tuni Municipal staff are not punctual. They citizens expressed their dissatisfaction towards the punctuality of municipal staff. 8. 44 percent of the respondents are dissatisfied by the quantity of work done by municipal cleaning staff. 9. The availability of staff at public service is questioned by 28 percent of the citizens in Tuni Municipality. 10. As per the data analyzed that almost there is lapse around 25 percent in work performance of this municipal employees. 11. It is noticed that 49 percent of the respondents in Tuni Municipal area are not satisfied with the water facility provided by the water department. 12. It is also found that 40 percent of the citizens are not satisfied with the availability of public taps, and maintenance around public nullas. 13. Still installation of water meters not implemented under this municipal jurisdiction. 63 % of the citizens are not aware of water meters.

1.8: SUGGESTIONS:

1. It is suggested to look into the dropouts at school level. It is also suggested to look into the percentage of students promoting to Graduation and Post- graduation.

81

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

2. It is suggested that there is a need to involve citizens in various municipal programs, the behavior of municipal staff play an important role. So, it is suggested to municipal staff to maintain cardinal relationship with citizens. 3. It is suggested to implement the agriculture activities in this areas, priority should be given to farmers in solving the problems relating to them. They expect proper water supply, canal management, roads. Therefore, it advised to provide the above said amenities for economic development of this area. 4. It is suggested that, people have long time association with the town, it on the part of municipality to protect culture and to promote amenities with high attention. 5. It is advised to all councilors to look into the issue, that they must be available to all citizens round the clock and they should respond to problems raised by them. 6. It is advised to the commissioner and Sanitary supervisors to ensure the punctuality, quality and quantity of work performed by the staff. It is also advised to adopt Aadhar based attendance to regulate punctuality. It is also advised to recruit sufficient staff to meet the expectations of the citizens. 7. It is advised to current Municipal Administrators to ensure that safe drinking water supply to all citizens regularly. 8. It is advised to them to increase the length of the water pipeline and to establish more number of public taps to cover slums and new colonies. 9. It is also found that time and procedures to regulate water connection should be simplified , 10. It is advised to the commissioner to look in to the complaints and time taken to solve the problems with in stipulated period. It is also advised to open a separate cell, which is intended to focus on grievances. It is also advised to provide some kind of short-term training on behavioural aspects to enhance good association by staff with citizens.

1.9: CONCLUSIONS:

Bifurcated Andhra Pradesh has some special challenges, like less financial support from Union government, construction of Capital City Amaravathi, Construction of Polavaram projects, and brings change in all economic activities. In-spite of all challenges it has strong determination of people, long coastal area, and good government with strong dedication. However, this impact on development of municipal administration, allocation budgets is unavoidable. So, this has direct or indirect impact on Tuni Municipality too. Along with this initial problems, there are many other internal problems like; lack of motivation, lack of proper supervision, lack of proper training, lack of sufficient staff, poor public awareness, high level expectations of

82

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 the public, low financial support through grant in aids, poor quality of works, work pressure to departments, over works are making this municipal administration for under performance. There are many positive aspects in Tuni Municipality like Thandava river, Nakkapalli Industrial Area, Agricultural support, Thalupulamma Lova Temple, and historical Buddhist culture, soft nature of the people, connectivity through National Highway five and East Concan Railways, fetch a lot to this Tuni Municipality. The researcher offered valid suggestion in this chapter to make this municipal administration more economical and effective. By meeting all expectations of the citizens with human touch can bring lot of satisfaction among the citizens of this area. Being a native of this area the researcher expecting kind and friendly behaviors of employees.

Bibliography

1. D. Sundar Ram, “Grassroots Planning and Local Governance in India: Policy Initiatives and People’s Participation, Kanishka Publishers, New Delhi 2010. 2. Raji S. Vegh (2010) in his work a comparative study of job satisfaction among the Employees, based on selected background variables, Of municipal corporation in Gujarat: A study of Saurashtra region. 3. S.L. Goel, “Urban Local – Self Government” Deep & Deep Publication Pvt., Ltd., New Delhi, 2011. 4. Critical Study of Implication of e-governance Services for effective communication with special reference to Citizens in Pune City, thesis submitted to Tilak Maharastra Vidyapeet, Pune2012

83

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

GLOCALIZATION AS GLOBALIZATION: EVOLUTION AND TRANSFORMATION OF A SOCIOLOGICAL CONCEPT

Dr.S. Balaji 6/779 A3, Saraswathipuram Rajampet,Kadapa District Andhra Pradesh Abstract

This paper examines the evolution and transformation of the concept of globalization highlighting the tangled relationship between the discipline of sociology and globalization. The paper will also trace the history and the development of the concept of “glocalization”. This paper will trace the roots of the Indian concept and its use in sociological discussions. The paper will also examine in broad terms concepts, theories and paradigms in sociology. The paper will also touch on the problems of the application of the sociological concepts developed in the western sociological and social scientific discourses.

1. Introduction

In social sciences it is often difficult to trace the origin of concepts. Concepts, theories and ideas are often products of collective endeavors. It would be extremely difficult to identify who used the term “globalization” for the first time. According to Ma lcolm Waters (1995) whose book titled Globalization is a fine primer, Roland Robertson was one of the early users of the term. More recently, Roland Robertson and Kathleen White edited Globalization: Critical Concepts in 6 volumes is a tour de force which presents some of the most important essays on this subject.

No matter who coined it first, at the dawn of the 21st century globalization as a concept, as a slogan, as a term is used more frequently than any other terms. In India, from the inflow of foreign capital, technology, workers or “foreign talents”, music, movies, popular culture, almost everything has resonance with globalization. Globalization is a heroic process, globalization is a sinister process, depending on which side of the debate one stands. Some tend to see globalization as a brakeless train crushing everything in its path, others see benefit in getting on board the train towards economic growth and modernization.

84

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

2. Sociology and Globalization

Globalization as a concept in social science has a short history. Even in the revised version of Raymond Williams’ Key Words (1983) there is no entry on globalization. The Harper Collins Dictionary of Sociology (1991) has an entry on “globalization of production” but no entry on globalization as such. The Oxford Concise Dictionary of Sociology (1994) has an entry on globalization together with globalization theory. It says, “Globalization theory examines the emergence of a global cultural system. It suggests that global culture is brought about by a variety of social and cultural developments…”. The entry refers to the b ook edited by Martin Albrow and Elizabeth King (1990) Globalization, Knowledge and Society. The term globalization was probably first used as a book title in the Albrow and King edited book (1990) which was published drawing on the essays published in various issues of International Sociology the journal of International Sociological Association (1986-1990) Some of the journal articles contained globalization as a phrase in the titles in the 1980s and even earlier (see Moore, 1966, Meyer, 1980; Robertson, 1983a, 1983b, 1985). One could even claim that the first social science text that dealt with the subject of globalization was The Communist Manifesto (1848). One could even argue that Ibn Khaldun (1332- 1406), the author of Prolegomenon to the Universal History was the real claimant of the credit. Globalization as a social process is old and has a much longer history. Many writers have traced the early globalizing processes in the dissemination of religion and culture, interactions of people, groups, communities through trade and commerce from the ancient times.

Sociology has been traditionally defined as the study of society. And as the boundaries of society have expanded from local community, through states to global society, sociology has become the study of the global society. This is a good illustration of how ideas, knowledge and (social) sciences expand with the changes and expansion of realities.

Sociology, it is often said, deals with the social life. In fact, all social sciences deal with social life or its various aspects. It is difficult to conceptualize social as a category. In sociology, there are two meanings of social. Social used in the sense of Wallerstein or for that matter Marx, encompasses technology, economy, politics and culture. Sociology is interested in the understanding of these broad processes, especially at their interrelatedness.

There is, however, a narrow meaning of social, which is often equated with social system, or what some people call societal. Here society is an abstract system of social relations, a web or network of social relations. Following

85

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Talcott Parsons, (and before him, Durkheim) some social scientists sought to view sociology as the scientific study of society. I put the stress on scientific because one of the goals of science is to define one’s field narrowly so that specialized and predictable knowledge can be produced and accumulated. Sociologists with a positivistic bent of mind were quite happy with the narrow definition of sociology, hence the delimited conceptualization of society in the sense of social system. In this formulation, the field of study of economics is economic system; the field of political science is political system and so on. All social sciences could live happily in a world of segregated systems of knowledge!

However, a large number of sociologists having dissatisfied with this narrow conceptualization of society, sought to view society and the scope of sociology broadly. They also found the earlier compartmentalization unnecessary, unproductive and overly abstract. All these so-called subsystems interact. Albert Hirschman called for the need of trespassing into each other’s domains. The rise of macro-sociology is a clear response to the attempt to overcome a delimited view of sociology. Barrington Moore, Wallerstein, Tilly, Skocpol and others have looked at society in the broadest sense of the term, in that the inspiration came from Marx, Weber and later Braudel and other social historians.

Globalization, though it means many things to many people, is one of the master processes of our time. Globalization as a field in sociology is a legatee of the macro-sociological interests and development. Globalization study addresses itself to the connectivity of broad processes of technological, economic, political, cultural interrelationships. Whether one looks at the economic, cultural or media connectivity worldwide, one has to take a much broader understanding of society and social institutions. Sociology focuses its analytical lenses on the flows and processes in society whether at the local, national or global levels. In other words, sociology has a genuine claim over the field of globalization.

Some contemporary writers accuse sociology, an archetypical social science, as a prisoner of nation-state. Anthony Giddens and Immanuel Wallertsien have both lamented that sociology has been the study of modern nation states. The definitions as well as the boundaries of society, which sociology seeks to study, often overlap with those of nation-state. Since the interest taken by sociologists such as Roland Robertson of Pittsburgh and others since the late 1970s, sociology has redefined its scope and field as the social scientific study of the global processes. Ulrich Beck has explicitly called for the development of new concepts to capture the new realities of interconnectedness, plurality, multi- locality and multiplicity.

86

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Sociology has established its claim over globalization as a field of study historically. A return to national society centered focus would be a major regressive step towards objectivist, scientistic sociology and a return to what C Wright Mills called “abstracted empiricism”. Or worse, sociology might become a residual discipline busy picking up areas left unattended by other social sciences. Sociology is not the only branch of social sciences that has a claim to study society because other branches of social sciences do study aspects of society. For example, institutional economists deal with social structure and cultural values to explain economic processes and market behaviors. Political scientists such as Robert Putnam have done important sociological studies of political processes. Such fields as political sociology illustrate the cross over of political science and sociology all the time. Social sciences are tasked to analyze society in all its various aspects and constellations.

The long-standing relationship between sociology and globalization, gives sociology as a discipline a unique position to study all aspects of the field of globalization, a master process in human society. This does not preclude the claims of other disciplines to the subject of globalization and it reminds us the importance of each field’s autonomy to venture out and explore using its own traditions and conceptual frames.

While globalization as a framework is naturally biased in favor of macro- sociological issues, questions were raised to the viability of using this framework to study social realities on the ground. This led to a rethink of macro-macro relationship. Glocalization as a concept arose to help alleviate the conceptual difficulties of macro-micro relationship.

Although it would be difficult to trace the first user of the term “glocalization” in its original Japanese usage, the first time the term was used in English can be attributed to Professor Roland Robertson, a British/American sociologist, who migrated from United Kingdom to the United States where he spent most of his academic career at the University of Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, USA. Robertson’s original interests in sociology were in the areas of sociology of religion, sociological theories and cultural sociology. He also ventured into areas of comparative sociology and modernization studies. His interest and knowledge of Japanese society led him to find out the use of the term “glocalization” in Japan in Japanese language, a term the marketing experts were using by which they meant that products of Japanese origin should be localized – that is, they should be suited to local taste and interests – yet, the products are global in application and reach, hence a new term “glocalization” was coined. Robertson and other

87

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 sociologists interested in the subject of global processes could not help noticing that many of the social categories and practices assume a local flavor or character despite the fact that these products were invented elsewhere. Dutch sociologist Jan Nederveen Pieterse has for some time used terms such as mélange, hybridity, syncretism to capture similar processes with regard to culture. According to Nederveen Pieterse, (2004) there are three views on the issue of globalization of cultures. The first view is the clash of cultures view expressed in terms of clash of the civilizations by writers like Samuel Huntington. The second notion is best expressed in the phrase of “McDonaldization” of the world (Ritzer, 2000). This view obviously suggests a homogenized world, a world dominated by a single culture that erases differences of local cultures. The third view is that of hybridization or synthesis. Much of human evolution of culture can be seen as exchanges, diffusion, etc. where cross-breeding, borrowing and adjusting to the local needs and so on were very common. I argue below that although glocalization belongs to the same genre or has resonance with those categories there are some important differences as well.

3. Evolution of the Concept Glocalization

According to the dictionary meaning, the term “glocal” and the process noun “glocalization” are “forme d by telescoping global and local to make a blend” (The Oxford Dictionary of New Words, 1991:134 quoted in Robertson, 1995:28). The term was modeled on Japanese word dochakuka, which originally meant adapting farming technique to one’s own local condition. In the business world the idea was adopted to refer to global localization. The word as well as the idea came from Japan (Robertson, 1995:28).

According to Wordspy, glocalization means “the creation of products or services intended for the global market, but customized to suit the local cultures.” Although the term glocalization has come to frequent use since the late 1980s, there were several related terms that social scientists used and continue to use. One such related word, which has been in use in social sciences and related fields for quite some time is, indigenization.

Some social scientists claimed that social sciences such as sociology and political science, even psychology were products of western social experiences therefore when these fields of inquiry were transported and transplanted to non- European or non-western contexts such as Latin America, Asia or Africa there was a need for indigenization of these subjects. The idea of indigenization has created quite a controversy among social scientists because it raises fundamental questions about the applicability of social scientific ideas and concepts.

88

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

However, indigenization can be seen as similar to localization. In both these concepts, there is an assumption of an original or authentic “locality” or “indigenous syst em”. One of the consequences of globalization is that it opens up doubts about the originality and authenticity of cultures. If one takes a long- term view of globalization, “locality” or “local” itself is a consequ ence of globalization. There are hardly any sites or cultures that can be seen as isolated or unconnected from the global processes.

Robertson, one of the pioneers in the study of globalization, did not view globalization as a recent phenomenon nor did he see it as a consequence of modernization. The theories of modernization came under serious attack in sociology because of such assumptions as unilinearity and convergence. As our knowledge of the world increased, many writers pointed out that the cultural differences are not all that superficial and nonlinearity and mutiliniearity are better descriptions of global modernity. Besides divergence rather than convergence seems to have been the consequence of modernization. Yet the divergent cultures and societies can be studied with the help of a globalized social science and there was no need for diverse, indigenized social sciences. Social sciences to claim scientific status could not afford to forfeit its claim to universality and universal knowledge. Social sciences must be context sensitive but not context dependent. It is in this context that Robertson conceptualized globalization in the twentieth century as “the interpenetration of the universalization of particularization and the particularization of universalism” (Robertson, 1992:100 emphasis in the original). Khondker (1994) building on Robertson’s framework argued that globalization or glocalization should be seen as an interdependent process. “The problem of simultaneous globalization of the local and the localization of globality can be expressed as the twin processes of macro-localization and micro-globalization. Macro-localization involves expanding the boundaries locality as well as making some local ideas, practices, institutions global. The rise of worldwide religious or ethnic revivalist movements can be seen as examples of macro-localization. Micro-globalization involves incorporating certain global processes into the local setting. Consider social movements such as the feminist movements or ecological movements or consider new production techniques or marketing strategies which emerge in a certain local context and over a period these practices spread far beyond that locality into a larger spatial and historical arena. Consider print industry or computer industry with a specific location of its emergence has now become a global phenomenon. Overcoming space is globalization. In this view of globalization, globalization is glocalization. This view is somewhat different from the way Giddens conceptualizes the relationship between the global and the

89

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 local. Globalization, for Giddens, “is the reason for the revival of local cultural identities in different parts of the world” (Giddens, 2000:31). While in this view local is the provider of the response to the forces that are global, we argue that local itself is constituted globally. Ritzer in discussing glocalization has added another – should I say, redundant – convoluted term “grobalization” to refer to what he calls “growth imperatives [pushing] organizations and nations to expand globally and to impose themselves on the local” (2004:xiii). For Ritzer, globalization is the sum total of glocalization and “grobalization”.

Wong argues, following Wind (1998), that a global company does not mean that it has gone global all the way. There are companies that are part global, part regional or part local involving different domains such as portfolio, supply chain, research and development and business processes. In terms of mode of business practices, there could be independent operations, joint venture or alliances (Wong, 1998:156).

4. Key Propositions

The main propositions of gloclaization are not too different from the main arguments of a sophisticated version of globalization. 1. Diversity is the essence of social life; 2. Globalization does not erase all differences; 3. Autonomy of history and culture give a sense of uniqueness to the experiences of groups of people whether we define them as cultures, societies or nations; 4. Glocalization is the notion that removes the fear from many that globalization is like a tidal wave erasing all the differences. A number of books and articles on the subject of globalization give the impression that it is a force that creates a uniform world, a world where barriers disappear and cultures become amalgamated into a global whole. The tensions and conflicts between cultures are nothing but the problems of a transitory phase. Ironically, the phase of transition has been around for a long period of time. And as we have entered the third millennia many of the age- old problems of differences of cultures and religion remain. 5. Glocalizaton does not promise a world free from conflicts and tensions but a more historically grounded understanding of the complicated – yet, pragmatic view of the world.

5. Globalization is not Westernization

Some writers view globalization as the worldwide spread of “westernization”. This view is either erroneous or contains only partial truth. From a superficial point of view, various processes outwardly seem that the world is, indeed, becoming westernized. One could see the popularity of the western music, movies, and “McDonalds” as examples of westernization. More

90

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 and more countries are seeing the opening of McDonalds. More and more countries playing the top chart of the pop list of USA and Hollywood movies and US-made television serials (such as, Friends and The Simpsons are becoming ubiquitous to the extent that some writers even use the term “Americanization” to describe these processes of cultural transmission. However, a closer look will reveal that these cultural goods have different meanings in different societal and cultural contexts with uneven impact on classes and age-groups. Some of the products are consumed without any modification, others are modified and indigenized to suit the local contexts and there are exceptional situations where the intentions are completely inverted.

In the past, many writers found it necessary to distinguish modernization from westernization. Modernization was believed to be a set of cultural practices and social institutional features that historically evolved in Europe and North America, commonly referred to as the West. The need to separate westernization from modernization (in the past) was motivated more by nationalism than pure intellectual reasons, because historically speaking, most of the modern cultural traits began in the West, a historical fact which was difficult to accommodate in a nationalistic political culture. The Western scholars in the nineteenth century were also guilty of making exaggerated claims of western superiority. Max Weber, a German sociologist was correct to claim that the western rationality and science had become universal but his denigration of non-western cultures did not sit well among the larger intellectual community. Many Indian sociologists took pains to delineate the differences between modernization and westernization. Similar discussions exist with regard to so-called westernization of the Ottoman Empire, modernization of Japan since the Meiji restoration of 1868 or modernization of China in the early part of the 20th century such as the May 4th Movement of 1919. In the modernization process, many of the late modernizing societies were borrowing ideas and knowledge and technology most of which were generated in the early modernized societies in Europe. The geography of the West kept shifting. In the nineteenth century, when Germany was modernizing, the idea of the West was limited to Western Europe only (mainly Britain and France). In some post-colonial situations the demarcation was based more on political expedience than logical or intellectual merits. Good westernization came to be regarded as modernization and bad modernization was designated as westernization. The distancing from westernization can also be understood as a reaction to centuries of domination and exploitation of the colonies by the western (mainly European) powers. However, over time a more objective consideration of history indicate that many of the traits that spread worldwide originated in certain geographical regions yet as these traits were transplanted elsewhere, they became mutated and assumed different forms in

91

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 different contexts. For example, parliamentary democracy evolved in England, with roots that go back to Magna Carta of 1215. However, as Westminster-style parliamentary democracy was institutionalized in India, Malaysia, and other former British colonies, they mutated in light of the local milieu.

Westernization as a term is not equivalent to globalization. Nevertheless, westernization can be seen as an aspect of globalization. Certain institutional features and cultural traits that originated in the west were put in place in many other geographical regions lock stock and barrel under the framework of global interconnections and diffusion or forced implantation under colonial age. Yet, over time these institutions and practices mutated and assumed new meanings. Therefore, westernization can be seen as the beginning of the process. The cultural features borrowed or imitated themselves mutate in the source countries. Thus, westernization as a category has limited conceptual value. One can associate certain literary forms, genres, and traits as part of the cultural zone we vaguely call “the west”, yet these are mere influences as one can see in artistic, literary, architectural styles. For example, the great Indian film maker late Satyajit Ray was influenced by Hollywood films and the art of film making, but he did not want to replicate Hollywood movies in Calcutta. His movies were modern capturing local themes which he projected with a modern art form and technology. Hence it was truly global, or more appropriately, glocal. Presently, India is establishing linkages with both Bollywood and Indian film industries as well seeking to play the role of an outsourced location for hi-tech Hollywood productions. Globalization, like modernization, is often a fusion. Westernization as a concept has some value if used only as a descriptive rather than analytic category. As an analytic category it is rather limited.

Writers such as John Meyer have used the idea of isomorphism (a term borrowed from science, botany, in particular) which means replication of the same form yet separated from the main source. His research has shown that modern education – not western education though it was perhaps modified and institutionalized in the west – has spread worldwide and a similar set of values and practices have emerged in diverse settings. For example, college graduates command more social prestige and respect almost regardless of cultural contexts. Some cultures can give more rewards than others. Globalization shows tendencies towards isomorphism, yet some people may continue to mistake this process for westernization.

In the context of India, the first generation leaders always emphasized the fact that although India’s economic development was dependent on western technology and capital, and it was reliant on multinational corporations to foster

92

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 economic growth, the state maintained a certain degree of autonomy and formulated broad social development strategy.

6. Glocalization and hybridization

In the discussion of glocalization some writers tend to conflate it with hybridization. This may be somewhat misleading. Glocalization involves blending, mixing adapting of two or more processes one of which must be local. But one can accept a hybrid version that does not involve local. In the context of higher education in India a hybridized version comprising the original British model and the US model was accepted. One could find many such examples in matters of technology and business practices where two different systems or modes are combined for better results. Glocalization to be meaningful must include at least one component that addresses the local culture, system of values and practices and so on. One of the areas in India where the evidence of glocalization is quite visible is the area of mass communication and especially in the area of television programming. From televised drama, sitcoms, and even “reality shows” one finds attempts of glocalization. Although some attempts are not always successful and there are instances when one can see unabashed imitation, by and large the idea of glocalization and fusion remain appealing to many Indians.

7. Technology and glocalization

India, located in Asia, has attained the developing country status or High Income Economy according to the World Bank classification. Having experienced rapid state-led economic development under a favorable global economic climate, India has been pursuing the goal of creating a knowledge- based economy since 1990s. India’s economic growth since her emergence in 1965 as an independent state entailed heavy investment in education and development of human resource in science and technology. India’s advancement in areas of knowledge and high technology is dependent to a large extent on international collaboration. Two aspects of India’s growth are striking: linkage with global market and a highly rational approach to governance, which is often evidenced by a near-absence of corruption. These two aspects have direct bearing on the issues of technological developments in India. An additional factor that one has to take into account is the cultural diversity of India population. India is both a multiethnic and multi-religious society, which provides an added dimension to the context of formulation of ethical standards. Its 4 million people (in 2004) comprise 76% Chinese, 14% Malay, 7% Indian, and 3% others. As many as one quarter of India population is non-citizens which indicate India’s

93

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 reliance on foreign human resources both at working class jobs as well as high end knowledge workers. Multicultural population-base and the varying sensitivity of various groups have influenced policies concerning biotechnology.

According to Stephen Haggard, “India had already broken away from the typical policy pattern of a developing country as early as 1970. By the 1980s Indian policymakers were identifying the country with small European economies such as Switzerland” (Haggard, 1999:355). It has been noted by a number of writers (Rodan, 1989; Wade, 1990 and Haggard, 1999) that India’s economic development and social modernization did not take place following a pure free market model. India was very much involved in guiding the market forces. On the one hand India has relied heavily for multinational corporations to launch economic growth but it also built a high rate of savings through central Provident Fund. India‘s development model showed certain mixed or hybrid quality.

Soon after India’s independence, policymakers began to focus attention on development in sciences and technology. The strive for such development was aided in the process by close relationship with the Multinational Corporations who brought investments and employed technically qualified Indians. Right from the early days of national development, India was well integrated with not only the international economic system bit also with global knowledge systems. India’s export-oriented economic development in the 1980s was dominated by IT and computer peripherals. In the 1990s emphasis on biotechnology followed an earlier emphasis on IT.

India’s development since her independence in 1965 can be described as a transformation from a Third World society to a First World economy. Much of that development can be attributed to India’s adoption of modern technology. Choices of technology were not always preceded by controversies and debates. Both the government and the general public showed a great deal of pragmatism in the choice of technology. Although in most instances, technology was adopted without much modification, the mode of use, and so on there were imprints of adaptation and glocalization. One such area is in the area of electronic road pricing system. The technology of monitoring cars from a scanner fitted in a gantry was not a Indian invention, but they way that technology was used was very Indian. Because of the drive to catch up, India has always been ahead in adopting new technology. It is in recent years having achieved the developed status; some Indias are showing concern with issues of privacy and so on because some of the new technology is intrusive. India’s love affairs with technology is evident in the fact that India ranks among the top three countries in the world in

94

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 terms usage of personal computers as well as hand phones. The only country ahead of India in the number of Short Messaging Service (SMS) is Hong Kong. Whenever a new technology is invented, India would be one of the first places where that technology would show up. Indias have a favorable attitude towards technology. India International Airlines as well as Port Authority of India remain equipped with the state of the art technology. ATM machines in India were introduced in the early 1980s. India’s public transport system is another place where one would find a great many applications of new technology. However, all cases of adaptation technology may not be seen as examples of glocalization. In many instances, for example, computer technology in India was implemented without any modifications. However as India entered a new phase of research in the 1990s, namely in the area of biotechnology we fins evidence of glocalization. Biotechnological research calls for a careful consideration of and orientation towards local cultural and ethical contexts. A good deal of attention has been given to these areas in India.

Another area where examples of glocalization can be found in both Malaysia and India is the area of architectural designs. In the post-socialist world, India remains a unique society where 90% of the population lives in the houses built and then sold to the citizens. When India was embarked on massive public housing program, it borrowed the so-called international style of very basic and practical designs, yet a new concept of public space – though limited to the residents of the housing blocs – evolved. These spaces known as void-decks were places for wedding, funeral or any such communal gatherings. New designs blending the western and local motifs emerged in India.

Although the initial architectural thrust of India can be viewed as “brutalism” driven by a sheer pragmatic consideration, over the years more attention has been given to the notions of fusion and hybridity, or in other words glocalization.

8. Conclusions

India’s development experience, which was underpinned by appropriate science and technology policies, provides a convincing example of the effectiveness of glocalization as a conscious development strategy. Although the strategy was not always perfect and there were lapses from time to time but on the whole India has shown that cultural fusion can be an asset if properly harnessed for the objective of attaining socioeconomic growth without creating gross inequality and social dislocation.

95

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

The sociological concepts of globalization in general and glocalization in particular can be of great value in understanding the dynamic social transformation in Southeast Asia. It is always possible to be carried away with “methodological nationalism”, a position that says each country or society should be examined in light of its own context through the devices of its own home- grown methodology. Such a position would lead to intellectual closure foreclosing dialogue and understanding between societies. In the globalized world such discourses have limited value. Yet, it is important to take the local context and variables and not to fall into the trap of blind imitation or aping of western ideas and concepts. However, in the end what is needed is a set of globally valid concepts that will help us examine processes of social transformation that is inextricably connected with global transformation.

References

1. Khondker, Habibul (1994) “Globalization Theory: A Critical Analysis” Department of Sociology Working Paper, National University of Singapore. 2. Meyer, J. W. (1980) “The World Polity and the Authority of the Nation State” in A. Bergesen (ed) Studies of the Modern World System. New York: Academic Press 3. Moore, W.E. (1966) “Global Sociology: The World as a Singular System” American Journal of Sociology, 71 (5) 4. Rodan, Gary (1989) The Political Economy of Singapore’s Industrialization, London: Macmillan 5. Wade, R (1990) Governing the Market: Economic Theory and the Role of Government in East Asian Industrialization, Princeton,N.J.: Princeton University Press 6. Waters, Malcolm (1995) Globalization. London: Routledge 7. Wong, Y.Y. (2000) “The Coming Challenge: An Entrepreneurial Pathway for the 21st Century” in a. Mahizhnan and Lee Tsao Yuan

96

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY AND EDUCATION: A COMPARATIVE STUDY OF GOVERNMENT AND PRIVATE SECTORS IN YSR KADAPA DISTRICT OF ANDHRA PRADESH

Mr. V. Ebenezer Immanuel School Assistant Government High School Koduru (RS), YSR Kadapa District Andhra Pradesh Abstract

Education is the backbone of every society in this world. But what matters the most is the quality education- a dream for many. In India, out of the 229 million students enrolled for class I – XII, only few receive quality education with good teachers and teaching aids. According to UNICEF specialist, 40-50 per cent of the children from 15-18 years age group are dropping out of schools. These drop-outs become child-labourers denying themselves access to quality education and professional skills. Today, education faces the rising challenges of standardized testing, strained budgets, teacher retention, and global workforce competition. Businesses have begun to take a more targeted approach in their corporate social responsibility programs and are seeking to impact areas that have a correlation with their own business goals. For many businesses, education is an important part of their plans, since the needs exist in all geographic areas, across all subject areas, and for all kinds of people. Higher educational institutions in the Marathwada seek to get quality and talented students. For the perception of higher educational institutions as quality institutions, it is essential that they behave in a socially responsible manner. Corporate social responsibility (CSR) is one of the useful tools to positively affect society and develop relationships with stakeholders. In this paper especially focuses on the corporate social responsibility and education: A comparative study of Government and Private sectors in YSR Kadapa district of Andhra Pradesh.

Key Words: Corporate, Social, Responsibility, Education, Geographic, Institution.

INTRODUCTION

Apart from the vast developments in India there is a darkest phase where children are being forced to work instead of going schools and receive education. Even with the enactment of right to education ACT 2009, which enforces free

97

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 and compulsory education for children between 6-14 years, plenty of children are being deprived of education. Every year numerous children get enrolled in government schools but only few of them complete the elementary education successfully. The reason is quality of education in government and government aided schools is deteriorated. They lack basic amenities, adequate infrastructure, adequate professional teachers, effective teaching aids and efficient school management etc. The other contributing reasons to this are Poverty, Unemployment, and discrimination on basis of caste, gender, race and other Social barriers. In case of higher education, the no. of aspirants is greater than the availability of the seats in universities. However plenty of private universities have been opened but the fees of such universities and colleges are very high that lower income group student cannot afford. The governments have limited resources to tackle these problems; therefore intervention of corporate sector in education is needed. Organizations goodwill, its public image is also enhanced by its social responsibility program. According to a survey, people tend to buy a product more if it is associated with any CSR program. For example, ITC is known for donating a profit margin from any stationary items purchased by customer to the welfare of schools supported by it. They very well advertised it, and in return what they got is a boost in sales figure. Along with, public image resulting in boosted sales, this publicity also helps them in branding. This branding has various direct and indirect advantages. Attracting skilled and talented professionals to work for the organization is one of the indirect advantages. Education is the backbone of every society in this world. But what matters the most is the quality education- a dream for many. In India, out of the 229 million students enrolled for class I–XII, only few receive quality education with good teachers and teaching aids. According to UNICEF specialist, 40-50 per cent of the children from 15-18 years age group are dropping out of schools. These drop-outs become child-labourers denying themselves access to quality education and professional skills. Some Indian companies have always strong philanthropic activities and target to education sector as the part of CSR, many initiatives are executed by corporate in partnership with Non-governmental organizations (NGOs) who are well versed in working with the local communities and are experts in tackling specific social problems. As per schedule – VII of company bill 2012, promotion of education is considered as CSR policy of company, even though some high profiled companies running their institutions for profit making by marketizing the education. So this paper explains prospects and challenges on both the social and corporate managerial perspective. This study tries investigates the significances of CSR for promoting

98

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 education and various initiatives of companies in education sector as a corporate responsibility to expansion education. Despite decades of reforms and government initiatives, a large number of students drop out of school for lack of quality education facilities. This phenomenon clearly shows the need for a distinctive approach to achieve the goals of providing quality education to the children of this country. Procuring quality education is the foundation of improving the lives of many. Major progress has been made to achieve the goal of providing quality education at all levels, yet India has a third of the world’s illiterates based on a report published by UNESCO. The quality of education provided to children in India is a huge concern. According to the Annual Status of Education Report 2016 (ASER 2016) which surveyed 589 rural districts of India, only 47.7 per cent students of class 5 can read class 2 level texts. This has declined from the previous year’s performance of 48.1 per cent. The students also failed badly in Arithmetic and English comprehensions. The proportion of all class 8 students in rural India who are willing to divide a three-digit number by a single-digit one has dipped to 43.2 per cent in 2016 from 44.2 per cent in 2017. And while 32 per cent of children in class 3 could read simple English words, in Class 5, only 1 out of every 4 students could read an English sentence. India wants to achieve the most skilled workforce in the world. Therefore, governments have started numerous education programs to make education accessible to all. The enrolment rate of children in schools is as high as 97 per cent, but the quality of education provided in the schools is below average. In 2016, 30.5 per cent of all elementary school children were in private schools as against 30.8 per cent in 2014. States like UP, Haryana, Punjab have more than 50 per cent of elementary school children in private schools, indicating the dwindling faith in government schools. All the government schemes like the Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan, Mahila Samakhya, and schemes for infrastructure development have worked so far only to enrol children into schools. Facilities of providing adequate training to teachers have been not at par.1

CSR & EDUCATION- INITIATIVES & STRATEGIES

CSR in Education so far in India has mostly involved steps to promote education among local communities or society at large by building schools scholarships sponsorships (helping schools run efficiently by providing teaching aids, books, uniform, shoes, and bags), increasing access to education (supporting/building secondary schools in localities that do not have one; encouraging children to go to school by spreading awareness, helping or training

99

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 teachers, providing infrastructure for the school; free transport facility), and higher education Other CSR practices for the education sector that are increasingly gaining popularity among specific industries include the promotion of computer illiteracy, establishment of gender equity by targeting girls from economically disadvantaged families for quality education, provision of toilets and maintenance of a clean and hygienic school environment, customization of programs designed to provide educational support to children with disabilities, provision of nourishment to students, psychological support to underprivileged students by providing motivational talks on leadership development, personality development, establishment of training institute for teachers, libraries for rural school education of slum children and night schools for uneducated adults for empowerment of illiterate public in surrounding villages, tribal areas. Awareness programs have been a significant part of CSR initiatives by companies with programs organized to spread awareness among the communities and the society at large about the importance of education and critical issues such as child labour, girl child, etc which hinder access to education. Taking this step further, programs can target quality education as well as holistic development of underprivileged children in the rural parts of the country, designed to empower students to explore, question, reason and communicate effectively. Moreover, companies can actively get involved in providing academic support to the public education system, specially govt. schools as the role of academic support is extremely crucial in the development of curriculum and materials, training of teachers, research based knowledge generation, assessment and evaluation, academic monitoring of schools.2

100

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

EVOLUTION OF CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY IN INDIA

India has a long tradition of paternalistic philanthropy. The process, though acclaimed recently, has been followed since ancient times albeit informally. Philosophers such as Kautilya from India and pre-Christian era philosophers in the West preached and promoted ethical principles while doing business. The concept of helping the poor and disadvantaged was cited in several ancient literatures. In the pre-industrialized period philanthropy, religion and charity were the key drivers of CSR. The industrial families of the 19th century had a strong inclination toward charity and other social considerations. However, the donations, either monetary or otherwise, were sporadic activities of charity or philanthropy that were taken out of personal savings, which neither belonged to the shareholders nor did it constitute an integral part of business. During this period, the industrial families also established temples, schools, higher education institutions and other infrastructure of public use. The term CSR itself came into common use in the early 1970s. The last decade of the twentieth century witnessed a shift in focus from charity and traditional philanthropy toward more direct engagement of business in mainstream development and concern for disadvantaged groups in the society. In India, there is a growing realization that business cannot succeed in isolation and social progress is necessary for sustainable growth. An ideal CSR practice has both ethical and philosophical dimensions, particularly in India where there exists a wide gap between sections of people in terms of income and standards as well socio-economic status.3

101

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Review of Literature Plankenet al (2010) investigated CSR platforms and the communication surrounding those platforms in India and established that the CSR platforms are typically used, together with stakeholder attitudes to both the form and content of those platforms. The authors presented the fact that the selected Indian corporations pursued a primarily philanthropic platform with a focus on community development projects, as predicted by previous studies. It also indicated, however, that Indian consumers may not value philanthropic CSR as highly as other CSR initiatives.4 Abha Chopra, Shruti Marriya(2013) The study will help the organisations to mitigate the skill gap with considerable experimentation, and learning-by-doing along the way. In this process, the affected individuals, companies, and society at large are likely to benefit. Major findings of the study is their will be a strong desire to change the current state of education, and of the current less-than- adequate regard for the impact of business on larger societies are, however, prerequisites.5 Dr. Sumanth S. Hiremath & Dr. Dasharath R. Albal (2016), the paper is an outcome of a review of a substantial number of secondary sources on the current scenario and challenges of higher education in India. The following are the three major areas, for instance: The Quality of Education in terms of infrastructure, teachers, and accreditation. The Affordability of Education, ensuring poor and deserving students are not denied of education and the Ethics in Education avoiding over-commercialization of education system, are to be focused to ensure that Indian Higher Education system is sustainable and meets global standards.6 METHODOLOGY This paper based on secondary data from various reports, journals, websites and existing work on the topic has been analyzed to arrive at certain results.

OBJECTIVS The main objectives of the present study as follows  Corporate Social Responsibility and education in YSR Kadapa district of Andhra Pradesh  A comparative study of government and private sectors in YSR Kadapa district of Andhra Pradesh.

102

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

CSR IN GOVERNMENT SECTOR EDUCATION IN YSR KADAPA DISTRICT

Making this world a better place is the mainspring of our Corporate Social Responsibility initiatives. To achieve this purpose, in 2015, we adopted the S. Uppalapadu village with a population of 3000 in the YSR Kadapa District of Andhra Pradesh State, India. Our goal was to make it a Smart Village by creating a model that can be replicated across India, and perhaps, the As a part of the Indian Prime Minister's vision to create Smart Villages, Feuji took up a 20- point program in the village to offer better infrastructure, education, employment, and empowerment to the village people. As part of this, the Feuji Foundation has invested over a million dollars in several programs including : world.  Clean water  Health center  Diagnostics lab  Pharmacy  Uninterrupted power  Sanitation  Roads  Water harvesting  Green plantation  Children's parks  Adoption of local schools  Employment opportunities

103

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Establishment of a skill development centres. This has helped not only the village, but also the surrounding small towns, which cover a population of about 45,000. The Feuji foundation collaborated with the local government and village development committee in this mission. After 2 years, the village is ready to be declared as one of the first Smart villages in the Andhra Pradesh State. We are also creating a digital platform using Sales force to capture the Smart village transactions and records.

SKILL DEVELOPMENT CENTRES IN YSR KADAPA DISTRICT We have built a 20,000 sq. ft. facility, fully-equipped with modern architecture, A/V, and Wi-Fi facilities for the people of Kadapa. We have the IT Graduate Hire Program through which IT graduates are counseled and helped in choosing their area of interest. The course focuses on developing IT skills, soft skills, and positive attitude. The goal of this program is to mold IT graduates into industry-ready software professionals.7 CSR IN PRIVATE SECTOR EDUCATION IN YSR KADAPA DISTRICT

It is a known fact that private schools are mushrooming in many parts of the state at a fast pace and many private school owners are becoming corepatis within an unimaginably short span of a few years’ time while the very teachers of their schools are toiling hard at an unimaginably meager pay. The teachers are the ones who are bringing up names of the private schools but their honorarium is not justified taking into account the sweat of their brows and hardship they have endured. In Manipur, government schools are as good as nonexistent. But of late, a little improvement has taken place, thanks to the Ministry of Education for his innovative Model Schools and fast conduct of TET. In a state like ours, parents, poor or rich have lost faith in government-run schools and hence we are

104

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 witnessing a mad rush for admission of their wards in private schools. Taking the opportunity, the owners of the private schools are taking the parents for a ride, taking admission and monthly tuition fees as per their whims and fancy at exorbitant costs. As the numbers of educated youths are exponentially on the rise with each passing year and the avenues for employment very few, many are left with no choice other than the hard choice of becoming teachers of private schools. For those born with silver spoons in their mouths, their predecessors have piled enormous wealth for two to three generations. They don’t need to become private school teachers but to fill in the shoes of their fathers or elders and carry on with their family’s business. With fat bank accounts in their names they can take up ventures and business houses keeping in veil the illegal black money churned out by them by hobnobbing with politicians, police, bureaucrats and even lawyers. Some educated and highly enterprising ones start from scratch by taking loans from financial institutions and came out successful. But they are only a miniscule percentage of the population.

Their number is negligible compared to the educated youths looking for means to earn money. The monthly salary of a primary school of a state government teacher is sufficient to give monthly pays for four to five teachers of a private school as per the prevailing scenario in the affairs of education in our state. No doubt, the private schools produce high quality education compared to government ones. It is the hard work of the hapless teachers who inculcate high quality education to the kids, but the monetary return for the time they toiled is not justified. Here, Roller Coaster Write can promptly say that it is a kind of social exploitation as teachers take a great role in shaping a good society and producing responsible and good citizens of the state and the nation. One very unpalatable reality about private schools is that once the names of the schools have carved a niche, the owners start to admit as many students as they can

105

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 during the lower classes and the sections of a class usually transcends from A, B, C, D……. to even H, I, J or more. As per government rule, the teacher-student ration should be 1:20 i.e. one teacher for every twenty students whereas in these private schools, the ratio is about 1:80 where the front benchers listening and the back benchers are simply watch, a very sad education scenario. Gradually, as the students climb to higher classes, high enough to take Board Exams be it Central Board of Secondary Education or Board of Secondary Education Manipur, they are pruned in such a way that the ones low in merit are kicked out like disposable use-and-throw items and only the best ones are retained. This is the reality show in education going on in private schools. Since only handfuls out of thousands are retained, the chances of the bright and brilliant retained students holding positions in HSLC or AISSE exams are quite high. Here, I would like to bring home the point that the worst kind of exploitations are meted out in private schools both to the categories of teachers and students. The teachers with unjustified salary and the weak and thrown out students in a state of dilemma. Private schools are also tantamount to corporate bodies. Now, it has become mandatory as per government of India’s policy that corporate bodies contribute something to the society to make a just and vibrant one. It is a kind of responsibility, a social responsibility for the betterment of society. Having a corporate social responsibility (CSR) policy is an important part of who we are, in fact it is the very core of our collective being. It goes in line with development on the principles of humanism. CSR in its full breadth and depth is, at its core, the embodiment of humanism as practiced by the business community. It acts as facilitator of a global platform wherein we strive to be unbiased, compassionate role models over and above adopting new strategies for building a better future by bringing positive changes. Nowadays, solutions are explored upon by multinational companies, NGOs as well as policy makers to address problems in the path of progress in developing countries through the means of corporate social responsibility, aiming to maximize its contributions to people and society as a whole. Now it is high time that the government enact some set of rules so that private schools apart from imparting knowledge to the students carry out their part in caring for the society as well as growth and development of people, and communities while reducing our impact on the environment, here at home, and around the world. As one of the most significant indicators of social progress, apart from education is shouldering responsibility in various key components and areas by respective entities, CSR also plays a decisive role for a society to achieve self-sustainable and equal development as corporate involvement in private schools should not be restricted to the pockets or exchequers of the owners. Private schools should be given the thrust to provide educational sponsorship program which offers free education to young disadvantaged children such as physically challenged or orphaned, with the

106

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 generous assistance of private sponsors. Such programs will help open new opportunities and avenues for such children in a poor state like ours. The private schools should also contribute in making a positive impact on climate and making a greener earth. They should take a part in monetary contribution whenever natural disaster such as earthquake, flood, drought etc happens. The concept of development, on societal level involves multiple dimensions. CSR is also one of the dimensions. In a state like ours with economy controlled only by a few, that also illegally, miniscule corporate growth, zero economic boom, to accomplish an all-round pattern of social progress, shouldering corporate social responsibility by private schools should be made mandatory by the government or at least the newspapers and media houses should make the issue grow momentum so that it becomes a moral code of conduct or ethics of private schools.8

CONCLUSION

With the increased competition in education sector, the criteria on which institutions judged are changing. Setting a corporate social responsibility strategy, and implementing the actions is one powerful way of achieving this goal. Most universities tend to focus only on teaching social responsibility in terms of corporate social responsibility initiatives and do not go beyond this by attempting to improve their communities. Yet in order to compete in the changing education industry and also to fulfil their mission in a world in perpetual transformation, education sector must recognize that their own actions should reflect the values and norms which they claim to embody. This means deepening their commitment to CSR at the operational level as well as the academic level, mostly by curricular activities. This will not only be beneficial to the institution itself but also will be beneficial to the society in general. CSR programmes should contribute a bulk of their resources to education. Investments in research spread of information and communication technology from school level onwards are the need of the hour. Collaborations between Government, educational institutions and corporate will accelerate educational reform and thus bring about the desired social development.

References

1. International Journal of Management (IJM) Volume 8, Issue 1, January – February 2017, pp.137–144, Article ID: IJM_08_01_015, www.iaeme.com. 2. https://www.youthkiawaaz.com 3. https://www.apeducation.org.in

107

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

4. IOSR Journal of Business and Management (IOSR-JBM) e-ISSN: 2278- 487X, p-ISSN: 2319-7668. Volume 13, Issue 4 (Sep. - Oct. 2013), PP 02 5. Abha Chopra, Shruti Marriya,” Corporate Social Responsibility and Education in India”, Issues and Ideas in Education Vol. 1 pp. 13–22 March 2013. 6. Dr. Sumanth S. Hiremath & Dr. Dasharath R. Albal,” Current Scenario of Higher Education in India: Reflections on Some Critical Issues”, International Research Journal of Social Science and Humanities Vol.1 (1) pp. 73-78 (2016). 7. https://feuji.com/corporate-social-responsibility 8. http://www.thesangaiexpress.com

108

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

ATTITUDE OF WORKERS TOWARDS SAFETY MANAGEMENT SYSYTEM IN ROURKELA STEEL PLANT

Prof. Mamata Nayak Dr.Lalata Keshari Pani Associate Professor Reader in Commerce Dept of Computer Science Engg Fakir Mohan (Auto) College Purushottam Institute of Engg & Odisha Technology,Rourkela, Odisha and Research Scholar, Kalinga University Chhatisgarh

Dr. Barada Prasad Bhol Registrar Purushottam Institute of Engg & Technology,Rourkela, Odisha

Abstract

Employees attitude are vital to an organization and its system. Attitude may be negative or positive. Positive attitude & negative attitude are referred as favourable & unfavourable attitude respectively in current management literature. Employees maintain favourable attitude towards an organizational system only when they are satisfied. Safety Management System (SMS) is not an exception to it. Constructive behaviour is an outcome of favourable attitude. Unsafe acts of an employee are not a constructive behaviour and contribute to accident, incident and near miss in the work place. Safety management System is responsible to create zero accident level in an organization by lowering rate of accident. There prevails a relation between SMS and favourable attitude of employees. Rourkela Steel Plant has been chosen as a sample organization to make an attitude survey of employees towards SMS. The attitude survey will consider variables such as skilled & unskilled workers, experienced and less experienced workers, married & unmarried workers. Safety management system is a comprehensive system which establishes effective safety criteria to minimize unsafe act and unsafe condition in workplace.

Key words- Attitude, survey experienced and less experienced workers, skilled workers, unskilled workers, married and unmarried workers, Safety Management System (SMS).

109

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

1.1 Introduction

Safety Management System (SMS) is a specialized thinking on prevailing safety management practices undertaken in an organization. SMS is a formal procedure to examine a complex process of an organization to reduce unsafe acts and unsafe conditions in conformity to an organizational objective. SMS enhances decision making by identifying problems so that judgment of experts can enable to achieve solutions. SMS is a comprehensive system which establishes effective safety criteria to minimize unsafe act and unsafe conditions in the workplace. Employees, employer and Government are main actors of SMS. Employees and employer play a key role in a safety management system. Govt, plays the role of mentor to monitor the SMS by its intervention. Safety Committee is represented by employees and employer. State Govt in the Department of Labour and Employment perform the task of a mentor. Statuary provisions mentioned in the Factories Act and The Employees’ Compensation Act, The Employees State Insurance Act, The Contract labour contract labour (Abolition and regulation Act) govern the safety management system. Favourable attitude towards SMS results in reducing the rate of accident in an organization. In other words, favourable attitude of workers towards SMS ensures higher productivity, higher production, higher profit and lower rate of accident.

1.2 Objective of the study The study pursues following objectives  To investigate the attitude of workers towards Safety Management system(SMS)  To investigate the attitude of workers towards SMS with respect to their skill, experience, marital status and education.

1.3 Hypotheses In view of the above objectives the study following empirical expectations are to be examined. HO1- There exist no significant difference in attitude between skilled workers and unskilled workers. H1A1- The mean attitude scores of skilled workers is more than the mean attitude of unskilled workers. H1A2- The mean attitude scores of unskilled workers is more than the mean attitude scores of skilled workers. HO2- There exist no significant difference in attitude between experienced and less experienced workers.

110

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

H2A1-The mean attitude scores of experienced workers is more than the mean attitude scores of less experienced workers. H2A2- The mean attitude scores of less experienced workers is more than the mean attitude scores of experienced workers. HO3- There exist no significant difference in attitude between married and unmarried workers. H3A1-The mean attitude scores of married workers is more than the mean attitude scores of unmarried workers. H3A2-The mean attitude scores of unmarried workers is more than the mean attitude scores of married workers. HO4- There exist no significant difference in attitude between educated and less educated workers. H4A1-The mean attitude scores of educated workers is more than the mean attitude scores of less educated workers. H4A2-The mean attitude scores of less educated workers is more than the mean attitude scores of educated workers.

1.4 Research Methodology In order to substantiate above hypotheses, the attitude of workers towards Safety Management System was measured. The investigator could not find a suitable tool to measure the attitude of workers towards Safety Management System (SMS). As a result, there was a need to develop an attitude scale due to non-availability of suitable tool to measure the attitude of employees towards Safety Management System. The purpose to develop the scale was to meet the requirements of the study.

1.4.1 Sample Two hundred fifty workmen of RSP were randomly chosen as sample from units namely Steel Melting Shop-II, Blast furnace1, Coke Oven. These workstations are chosen as sample of study taking its relevance in the context of Safety, Health and Environment of the organisation. Table 1 Sl. Sample Department Total no. of non- Sample taken for No. executive study deployed 1 COKE OVEN 1161 120 2 SMS-II 1263 80 3 BLAST FURNACE1 886 50

111

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

1.5 Tools used 1.5.1 Attitude scale development & administration In the present investigation the attitude of workers towards safety management system (SMS) was measured. The main purpose of the study is to develop an attitude scale to meet the requirement of the problem under investigation. The concept of attitude has been defined like any other concepts in social psychology (Fisher, 1977). Perhaps, in an effort to simplify the term attitude, more than one methods are available. The pioneers in attitude measurement tended to define the term attitude narrowly (Lemon, 1973) in terms of intensity of effect for or against psychological object (Thurstone, 1928). Cook and Sellitiz (1964) recognize the affective, cognitive and behavioural intension aspects of attitude and they are included in the definition of attitude. The behaviour can be inferred favourable or unfavourable feelings. These views are also supported by Zimbaro and Ebbeson (1970) who regarded attitude to have three components viz. affective, cognitive and behavioural. The affective components is said to consist of a person’s evaluation of emotional response to some object or person. The cognitive component is conceptualized as a person’s belief about or factual knowledge of object or person. The behavioural component includes a person’s overt behaviour directed towards the object or person. Attitudes can’t be observed but can be inferred from behaviour. The process of measuring attitude therefore can be conceptualized comprising of three stages: i. Identification of the types of behaviour sample that is acceptable as a basis for making inferences. ii. Collection of samples of behaviour. iii. Treatment of behaviour samples so as to convert findings about them into quantitative variable (Summers, 1970). 1.5.2 Approaches to attitude Measurement Since attitudes are defined as latent and not observable, some behaviour may be identified and measured as an index of the attitude construct. There are several recognized approaches or procedures used to determine the attitude towards some objects or persons. Henerson, Morris and Fitzgibbon (1978) have classified the approaches for collecting information in following four categories. These approaches are: i. Self-reports where the members of group report directly about their own attitude. ii. Report of other.

112

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

iii. Sociometric procedures where members of a group report about their attitudes towards one another. iv. Records, which bear systematic accounts of regular occurrences such as attendance, reports, sign in sheets, library check out records and inventories. Within each of these categories there are strategies for measuring attitude of related behaviour. Most commonly, attitude measurement is accomplished by one of the following technique like (i)Questionnaires, (ii) Rating scale, (III) Interview, (iv) Written reports, (v) Observation or Sociometric. A specific strategy for attitude measurement should be chosen for examination. Keeping in view the purpose of attitude scores, the status of workers and their work environment, safety policy of management, and prevailing safety practices of the organization and safety monitoring strategy of the Government are taken into consideration as self-reporting approach. 1.5.3 Search for Items Measurement of attitude of workers towards Safety Management System is a complex task because of its wide range seemingly identifiable and non-identifiable multidimensional concepts involving controversial issues. Despite complexities after operationalizing the concepts associated with attitude towards Safety Management System, the following variables were considered as most appropriate like hazard identification, hazard assessment, hazard control and emergency preparedness, functions of safety committee, risk assessment, risk control, safety training, and safety audit reports.

1.5.4 Technique of Scale Construction Among the other techniques, Thurstone and Likert methods were used by investigators. The correlation between the scales prepared by two methods is quite high. The study of Eyeneck and Crown (1948) tells that the two methods are equally good but Likert methods are superior than Thurstone method. Thurstone method is complicated, time consuming and lengthy as compared to Likert method. Likert scale being a simple method was considered the most appropriate and suitable technique for scale construction. 1.5.5 Initial Item Selection After taking into consideration the technique of scale construction and the sub areas are to be included in the scale. There are 54 formulated statements scrutinized for the purpose of construction of the scale. These statements were scrutinized keeping in view the criteria suggested by Likert (1932), Thurstone and Chance (1929) and Wang (1932), Bird

113

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

(1940) Edwards and Kilatrik (1948) to measure the attitude of workers towards Safety Management System. The scale was designed to measure attitude of workers towards SMS. Special attention was given to structure of the sentence, words used in the statements. After proper scrutiny 32 statements are selected for tryout. 1.5.6 Tryout of Attitude Scale towards SMS All the selected statements were printed in booklet form. Each statements was followed by five point scale, i.e., strongly agree, agree, undecided, disagree, strongly disagree. In spite of considerable amount of controversy over neutral (undecided or uncertain or I do not know) category (Kretch and Crutchfield, 1948 and Edwards, 1969), the investigator felt the necessity of keeping this category. Response on undecided category may be due to following reasons: i. That, the worker is undecided as he is neither aware of aspects nor convergent with the practices prevailing in the organization. ii. That, the worker is strongly in favour of some other aspects. iii. The worker has no opinion. iv. The statement does not appear relevant. Since the workers were taken as sample for the study, it was believed that they could appreciate and respond satisfactorily on five point scale. The first draft of attitude scale consisting of 32 statements was administered on 250 workers of Rourkela Steel Plant (RSP). They were asked to respond to each statement in terms of their degree of liking or disliking with the statement. The response of workers on the statements was scored according to the method of summated ratings with weightage of one through five. The scale points of strongly agree, agree, undecided, disagree and strongly disagree were given weightage of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 respectively to each positive statements and 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 to each negative statements. For each subject, a total score was obtained upon all the statements. 1.6 Item Analysis Item analysis was carried out in order to determine the scale items by differentiating between the criterion groups based on total scores. There are many prevalent methods for Item analysis such as t ratio, the mean and the correlation method. As a convenient frame of reference,‘t’ ratio technique was decided to be used for Item analysis. The administered copies of the scale were scored with the help of the Likert's scheme of weightage. The copies were arranged in the decreasing order of aggregate scores and 27 percent bottom scoring copies were selected for analysis of each statement separately. For each statement, a frequency distribution of upper and similar distribution of lower group

114

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

was constructed. The mean and standard deviation for lower as well as upper group were computed separately and then the ‘t’ ratio of the difference in the means of two groups was computed for each statement. The obtained ‘t’ values varied from 6.32 to 0.24. Only 32 statements were selected and were arranged in rank order according to their‘t’ values which varied from 6.32 to 1.94. Thus, 32 statements were selected finally for the scale from the first draft. Out of 32 statements, there were 15 positive and 17 negative statements. Since it was Likert type scale every positive statement carried weightage 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 and for every negative statement carried scores 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 for every positive statement. The item numbers of two categories of positive and negative statements of attitude scale are given in table no 2. Table-2 Positive and Negative statements of Scale to measure Attitude of Workers towards Safety Management System(SMS) Category Frequency Item Number Positive 15 1,2,3,5,6,7,13,18,19,20,27,28,29,31,32 statements Negative 17 4,8,9,10,11,12,14,15,16,17,21,22,23,24,25,26,30 statements

1.6.1 Reliability The reliability of attitude scale was computed by split half method. The scale was administered again on 250 workers of different departments. The items of the scale were divided into two halves by putting the scores on odd and even numbered items. Product movement correlation was used to find out the reliability coefficient of half test was 0.84. The Spearman- Brown Prophecy formula was used for estimating the reliability coefficient of attitude scale and it came out to be 0.91. So the reliability coefficient of attitude scale is 0.91. The significance of coefficient of reliability obtained for this attitude scale was tested by Fisher’s Z function. Table ‘C’ from Garrett (1985) was consulted for converting ‘χ2’ into Z and Z back into χ2 . Fiduciary limits of the obtained coefficient are given in Table No 3. Table-3 Fiduciary Limit of attitude scale Reliability Method N Reliability Fiduciary Fiduciary coefficient Limit at 0.05 Limit at 0.01 level Level Split Half 250 0.91 0.865 to 0.935 0.855 to 0.945

115

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

The table indicates that the width of the fiduciary limit is so narrow that the trustworthiness of coefficient of reliability of the scale is beyond doubt which can be used for the investigation as a reliable tool. 1.6.2 Validity The construct validity of the scale to measure attitude of workers towards management was determined. It was established rationally through critical examination by professionally expert judges. The scale was given to 12 judges for opinion. All judges were satisfied on the relevance of the test. All judges opined that the scale is fairly valid and thus can be recommended for use on similar population.

1.7. Procedure of Data Analysis 1.7.1 Data Processing The study focuses on the attitude wherein the need was felt to quantify the data. Summated rating scoring scale developed by Renis Likert (1932) popularly known as Likert type technique was applied for the purpose. 1.7.2 Overall attitude of workers towards SMS in RSP A Likert type attitude scale has been developed and standardized to obtain data on attitude of workers towards Safety Management System for the purpose of interpretation by analyzing the data. Table-4 Overall attitude of workers towards SMS in RSP Category N Percentage Favourable 204 81.60 Neutral 05 2.00 Unfavorable 41 16.40 Table No 4 shows that 82 percent of workers were having favourable and about 16 percent of workers were unfavorable towards Safety Management System. About 2 percent of workers were neutral so far as their attitude towards Safety Management System is concerned. 1.7.3 Workstation wise attitude of workers towards SMS Table-5 Workstation attitude towards SMS in RSP Workstations N Favourable Neutral Unfavourable Coke Oven 120 97 02 21 (80.33) (1.67) (17.50)

SMS-II 80 65 02 13 (81.25) (2.50)

116

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

(16.25)

Blast Furnace 50 42 01 07 (84.00) (2.00) (14.00)

(Numerical values given in the parentheses are percentage) A persual into Table No 5 shows that the percentage of workers having favourable, neutral and unfavorable attitude towards Safety Management System in RSP. It is evident from the table that in Coke Oven about 80 percent of workers were having favourable attitude towards Safety Management System followed by about 81 percent in SMS-II and 84 percent in Blast Furnace. About 2 percent of workers of Coke Oven and 3 percent of workers in SMS-II were having neutral attitude towards Safety Management System. About 2 percent of workers were working in Blast Furnace maintained neutral attitude towards Safety Management System. About 18 percent of workers working in Coke Oven and 16 percent workers working in SMS-II were having unfavorable attitude towards Safety Management System. About 14 percent of workmen working in Blast Furnace also maintained unfavorable attitude towards Safety Management System. The attitude of workers towards Safety Management System can also be represented through bar diagram. Figure 1 Workers attitude towards SMS in RSP 100 80

60 Favourable 40 Neutral 20 Unfavourable 0 Coke SMS-II Blast Oven furnace

A glance at the Fig 1 indicates that about 84 percent of workers working in Blast Furnace were having favourable attitude towards Safety Management System followed by about 81 percent of workers working in SMS-II in RSP. About 80 percent of workers working in Coke Oven in RSP were having favourable attitude towards SMS.

117

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

A visual inspection of Fig 1 indicates that about 2 percent of workers of both Coke Oven and Blast Furnace maintained neutral attitude towards SMS. About 3 percent of workers working in SMS-II were having neutral attitude towards SMS. It may also be observed from the figure that about 18 percent of workers working in Coke Oven were having unfavorable attitude towards SMS. About 16 percent of workers of SMS-II and about 14 percent of workers of Blast Furnace working in RSP also maintained unfavorable attitude towards Safety Management System. In order to investigate the attitude of workers towards SMS with respect to their skill, marital status and education attitude scores were tabulated by following descriptive and inferential statistics. 1.7.4 Attitude of skilled and unskilled workers In order to investigate the attitude of skilled workers as compared to unskilled workers the Means, Standard Deviation (SD), Standard Error of Difference between two means and difference between two means along with critical ratio are computed in order to investigate the attitude of skilled and unskilled workers. Table-6 Means, SDs, Standard Error of difference between two means, Mean Difference and Critical Ratio of skilled and Unskilled workers in RSP Category N Mean Standard Standard Error Mean Critical Deviation of Difference Ratio Difference(σD) Skilled 80 111.324 19.968 Workers 3.208 9.152 2.853 Unskilled 58 102.324 17.549 Workers

Table No 6 shows that the calculated t value came out to be 2.853. The required values to be significant at .05 and .01 level of confidence with 136 degrees of freedom are 1.98 and 2.61 respectively as given in the table of t. Hence, the difference between means of two groups was found significant at .01 level of confidence. On the basis of above result the null hypothesis (HO1) was rejected in favour of alternative hypothesis (H1A1) namely, ‘The mean attitude scores of skilled workers is more than the mean attitude of unskilled workers’. An examination to their means reveals that the skilled workers are having more favourable attitude towards SMS than unskilled workers.

118

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

1.7.5 Attitude of experienced and less experienced workers In order to investigate the attitude of experienced workers in comparison to less experience workers the means, standard deviations, standard error of difference between the two means along with critical ration were computed in Table 7.

Table-7 Means, SDs, Standard Error of difference between two means, Mean Difference and Critical Ratio of Experienced and Less Experienced workers in RSP

Category N Mean Standard Standard Error Mean Critical Deviation of Difference Ratio Difference(σD) Experienced 109 109.732 20.531 Workers 2.681 7.249 2.704 Less 141 102.483 21.642 Experienced Workers

Table 7 shows that the calculated t value came out to be 2.704. The required values to be significant at .05 and .01 level of confidence with 248 degrees of freedom are 1.97 and 2.59 respectively as given in the table of t. hence, the difference between means of two groups are found significant at .01 level of confidence. On the basis of the above results the null hypotheses (HO2) is rejected in favour of alternative hypotheses (H2A1) namely, “The mean attitude scores of experienced workers is more than the mean attitude scores of less experienced workers”. An examination of their means reveals that experienced workers are having more favourable attitude towards Safety Management System than less experienced workers.

1.7.6 Attitude of Married and Unmarried Workers In order to investigate the attitude of married workers as compared to unmarried workers the means, standard deviations, standard error of difference between the two means along with critical ratio were computed in shown in Table 8.

119

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Table-8 Means, SDs, Standard Error of difference between two means, Mean Difference and Critical Ratio of Married and Unmarried workers in RSP Category N Mean Standard Standard Error Mean Critical Deviation of Difference Ratio Difference(σD) Married 162 108.311 21.622 Workers 2.661 2.859 1.074 Unmarried 88 105.452 19.215 Workers Table No 8 shows that the calculated t-value came out to be 1.074. The required values to be significant at .05 and .01 level of confidence with 248 degrees of freedom are 1.97 and 2.59 respectively as given in the table. Hence, the difference between means of two groups was not found significant even at .05 level of confidence. On the basis of the above results, the null hypothesis (HO3) namely, “There exist no significant difference in attitude between married and unmarried workers” is accepted. The above finding could not provide evidence to reject the hypothesis HO3 in favour of alternative hypothesis. The findings reveal that there exists no significant difference in attitude between married and unmarried workers towards Safety Management System. The difference observed in means is due to contribution of chance. The difference is not statistically significant. 1.7.7 Attitude of educated and Less educated workers In order to investigate the attitude of educated workers as compared to less educated workers the means, standard deviations, standard error of difference between the two means along with critical ration were computed in Table 9. Table-9 Means, SDs, Standard Error of difference between two means, Mean Difference and Critical Ratio of Educated and Less Educated workers in RSP Category N Mean Standard Standard Error Mean Critical Deviation of Difference Ratio Difference(σD) Educated 128 110.154 21.532 Workers 2.62 6.026 2.30 Less 122 104.128 20.014 Educated Workers Table No 9 shows that the calculated t-value came out to be 2.30. The required values to be significant at .05 and .01 level of confidence with 248

120

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

degrees of freedom are 1.97 and 2.59 respectively as given in the table of t. Hence, the difference between means of two groups was found significant at .05 level of confidence. On the basis of above results, the null hypothesis HO4 is rejected in favour of alternative hypothesis (H4A1) namely, “The mean attitude scores of educated workers is more than the mean attitude scores of less educated workers “. The examination of means reveals that educated workers are having more favourable attitude towards Safety Management System in comparison to less educated workers. 1.8 Findings The study on attitude of workers reveals that most of the workers working in Rourkela Steel Plant (RSP) maintain favourable attitude towards existing SMS. It is a healthy symptom pertaining to safety management in RSP. While analysing the overall status of employees’ attitude towards SMS, it is revealed that about 82 percent of workers are having favourable attitude towards Safety Management System of RSP. About 16 percent of workers maintain unfavourable attitude towards Safety Management System. About 2 percent of workers maintain neutral attitude towards Safety Management System. About 84 percent of workers working in Blast Furnace unit of RSP are having favourable attitude towards SMS followed by about 81 percent of workers in SMS-II. About 80 percent of workers working in Coke Oven maintained favourable attitude towards Safety Management System. It shows that the workers working in Blast Furnace have most favourable attitude towards the Safety Management System of the organization. About 18 percent of workers working in Coke Oven are having unfavorable attitude followed by 16 percent in case of workers working in SMS-II. About 14 percent of workers working in Blast Furnace are having unfavorable attitude towards SMS. It is evident from the study that a minimum percentage of workers working in Blast Furnace are having unfavorable attitude towards Safety Management System. Whereas highest percent of workers working in Coke Oven were having unfavourable attitude towards Safety Management System. The mean attitude scores of skilled workers are more than the mean attitude scores of unskilled workers. Thus, it is evident that skilled workers have more favourable attitude towards SMS than unskilled workers. The mean attitude scores of experienced workers is more than the mean attitude scores of less experienced workers. Experienced workers have more favourable attitude towards SMS than less experienced workers. There exists no significant difference in the attitude of married and unmarried workers.

121

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

There is a significant difference between the educated workers and less educated workers towards Safety Management System. The study identified that some workers maintained unfavorable attitude towards existing Safety Management System of RSP. It requires more safety motivation to get better result. 1.9 Discussion Attitude is the sole of safe performance in workplace. The Safety Management System minimizes unsafe act and unsafe conditions to prevent accident in the workplace. Safety Management System is a dynamic system. It requires continuous improvement by planning, reengineering and recommending for faithful improvement. Positive attitude of the workmen towards Safety Management System can minimize unsafe act thereby preventing accident. In other words favourable attitude towards Safety Management System can minimize rate of accident. The instant study tries to explore attitude of workmen taking variables such as skilled, unskilled, educated, less educated, married, unmarried, experienced, and less experienced. The findings provide safety inputs to the safety personnel to redesign the Safety Management System for favourable attitude towards Safety Management System in case of necessity. Similar study can be conducted taking other such as aluminium, oil, coal into consideration to design Safety Management System.

References

1. Andriessan JHTH (1978), 'Safe Behaviour and Safety Motivation' pub in: Journal of Occupational Accidents, 1: 1978, pp363-376 2. Barrow (1977) 'The Employee's Attitude Towards his Supervisor and his Company is one of the Primary Factors in Determing his (Safety-Related) Behaviour’ (1977) 3. Bird,C.(1940).Social psychology. New York: Appetion-Century-Crofts. 4. Brayfield A H and Crockett W H (1955), 'Employee Attitudes and Employee Performance', pub in: Psychological Bulletin, Vol 52, No 5, 1955, pp396- 422 5. Chaiken, Shelly and Charles Stangor (1987), “Attitude and Attitude Change,” Annual Review of Psychology, 38, 575-630. 6. Cook,S.W. and Selltiz, C.A.(1964), A multiple Indicator Approach to Attitude Measurement. Psychologycal Bulletein, Vol., 62,35-36. 7. Edwards, A.L.(1969) Techniques of Attitude Scale Construiction. Bombay: Vakils, Feffer 7 Siemens Pvt Ltd. 8. Eyseneck, H.J. and Crown, S.(1948). An Experimental Study in Opinion Attitude Methodology Int.J.Open Attitude Research. Vol.3,47-86.

122

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

9. Fisher, R.J..(1977). Towards the More Comprehensive Measurement of Intergroup Attitudes: An Interview and Rating Scale Procedure. Canadian Journal of Behavioural science. Vol9,283-294. 10. Grimaldi J V, (1965), ‘Measuring Safety Effectiveness, in: Safety and Accident Prevention in Chemical Operations’, by R H Fawcett and W S Wood (eds), New York, USA, Caterscience, Publishers, 1965 11. Grimaldi J V (1970), 'The Measurement of Safety Engineering Performance' Journal of Safety Research, 1970, Vol 2, pp 137-159, 3rd ed. Homewood Ill, Irwin 75 12. Henderson et al (1978), ‘How to Measure Attitudes’, pub: Sage Publications, Beverley Hill, London 1978 13. Hale A R and Perusse M (1979), 'Attitudes to Safety : Facts and Assumptions', In Safety at Work, Jenny Phillips (ed), SSRC, Wolfon College, Oxford, 1979 14. Lemon, N.(1973). Attitude and Their Measurement. Newyork: John Willey & Sons Inc 15. L. L. Thurstone, "Attitudes Can Be Measured," American Journal of Sociology, January, 1928. 16. Leather Phil (1983), 'Safety Attitudes on the Construction Site', pub: Construction News, Dec 15th, 1983 17. Likert R A (1957), “A Technique for the Measurement of Attitudes”, New York, Appleton-Century Crofts, 1957 18. Ord Russell, (1984), 'Organising for Safety', pub: Building Technology & Management, July/Aug 1984 19. Safety Policy, Rourkela Steel Plant, Safety Engineering Department, Rourkela Steel Plant, Steel Authority of India Limited., 2007 20. Safety Manual, Safety Engineering Department, Rourkela Steel Plant, Steel Authority of India Limited., 2007 21. Thurstone, L.L.(1928). The Measurement of Opinion Journal of Abnormal & Social Psychology. Vol.22,415-430. 22. Thurstone, L.L. & Chave, E.J.(1929). The Measurement of Attitude , Chicago University, Chicago Press. 23. Wang, K.A.(1932). Suggested criteria for Writing Attitude Statements. Journal of Social Psychology, Vol.3,367-373

123

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

A STUDY ON EFFECTIVENESS OF FINANCIAL SERVICES IN ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT OF INDIA

Dr.R.Rama Krishna Senior Lecturer in Economics M.R. College (A) Vizianagaram Abstract

Economic Development of any country depends upon the existence of a well-organized financial system. Financial system which supplies the necessary financial inputs for the production of goods and services which in turn promotes the well-being and standard of living of the people of a Country. In general, all types of activities which are of a financial nature could be brought under the term 'Financial Services'. The term financial services in broad sense mean "mobilizing and allocating savings. Thus all activities involved in the transformation of savings into investments. The economic liberation that brought is a complete transformation in the Indian financial services industry prior to the economic liberalization the Indian financial sector was characterized by so many factors, which retarded the growth of this sector. These are the some of the significant factors. Excessive controller in the form of regulation of interest rates, money rates etc. Too many control over the prices of securities under the rest while controller of capital issues. Absence of independent credit rating and credit released agencies. Lack of information about international development in the financial sector. Non-availability of delete instruments on a large-seal

INTRODUCTION

The financial system plays a significant role in process of economic development. India has a diversified financial sector undergoing rapid expansion, both in terms of strong growth of existing financial services, firms and new entities entering the market. The sector comprises Commercial Banks, Insurance Companies, NBFCs, Cooperatives, Pension Funds, Mutual Funds and other Smaller Financial Entities. However, the financial sector in India is predominantly a banking sector with Commercial Banks accounting for more than 64 per cent of the total assets held by the financial system. In general, all types of activities which are of a financial nature could be brought under the term 'Financial Services'. The term financial services in broad

124

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 sense mean "mobilizing and allocating savings. Thus all activities involved in the transformation of savings into investments. The economic liberation that brought is a complete transformation in the Indian financial services industry prior to the economic liberalization the Indian financial sector was characterized by so many factors, which retarded the growth of this sector. These are the some of the significant factors. Excessive controller in the form of regulation of interest rates, money rates etc. Too many control over the prices of securities under the rest while controller of capital issues. Absence of independent credit rating and credit released agencies. Lack of information about international development in the financial sector. Non-availability of delete instruments on a large-seal.

Merchant Banking: - Merchant banker is a financial intermediary who helps to transfer capital from those who Posen it to those who need it. Merchant banking includes a wide range of activities such as management of customer’s securities Portfolio management. Thus a merchant banker renders a host of services to corporation and thus promoter industrial development in the country. At the end of October, 2015, the overall existence of merchant banks in some states, such as Maharashtra state occupies the first place having 108 merchant banks, followed by Gujarat (22), Andhra Pradesh (8), and one Merchant bank each in other states like Punjab, Orissa and Haryana etc.

125

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

IPO RANK VOLUME NO Mkt Deals League (Rs.Cr) OF SHARE(%) Table IPOS Kotak 1(4) 1,589 7 11.64 InterGlohe, Coffee Day, Dr Lal Axis Bank 2 (2) 1,468 7 1076 Alkem, Syngene, Coffee Day Citi 3 (NA) 1,312 4 9.61 InterGlobe, Coffee Day, Dr Lal ICICI 4(8) 1,001 6 7.34 Teamlease, Quick Heal, VRL JPMorgan 5(NA) 988 3 7.24 InterGlobe, Alkem, Quick Heal

ECM League Rank Volume No Mkt Deals table (Rs.Cr.) of Share(%) IPOs Goldman Sachs 1(5) 22,262 3 25.67 Sun Pharma, Axis, IndusInd citi 2 (4) 12,377 16 14.27 Kotak Bank, Eicher, Infosys JM Financial 3(6) 6,105 9 7.04 Indian Oil, REC, GMR Infra Axis Bank 4(8) 4,955 16 5.71 Indiabulls Housing, PFC, GMR Infra Kotak 5 (2) 4,915 12 5.67 Indian Oil, Tata Motors, InterGlobe

126

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

ECM IS equity capital market, which includes IPO( initial public offering):Rank is for FY16 and figures in brackets show FY15 Rank:FY16 data till Tuesday: list is not exhaustive: compiled by samie modak : source: Bloomberg: disclaimer : Kotak Mahindra and associates are significant shareholders in business standard Pvt. Ltd. The above table indicates that the Rank, Volume, No. of .IPOs and market share for the financial year 2015-2016,Kotak Mahindra has topped IPO (initial public offering) rankings for 2015-16, with a market share of 12 per cent. The private lender managed seven IPOs and a volume of Rs 1,589 crore. Some transactions were of Inter Globe Aviation and Coffee Day Enterprises. Meanwhile, rankings of equity capital market (ECM, which includes IPO) were topped by US-based Goldman Sachs, on the back of big-ticket share deals such as that of Sun Pharmaceutical. A total of Rs 13,647 crore has been raised by 67 IPOs in 2015-16, while ECM volume is Rs 86,714 crore. In 2014-15, Rs 3,039 crore was raised through IPOs and ECM volume stood at Rs 85,021 crore, say data compiled by Bloomberg.

Loan syndication:- This is more or less similar to consortium financing. But this work is taken up by the market banker as a lead manager. It refers to a loan arranged by a bank called lead manager for a borrower who is usually a large corporate customer or a government (Department).

Leasing:- Lease is an agreement under which a company or a firm acquires a right to make use of a capital asset like machinery on payment of a prescribed fee called "rental charger". In counties like the U.S.A, UK and Japan equipment leasing is very popular. Nearly 25% of plant and equipment is being financed leasing companies. In India also, many financial companies have started equipment leasing business.

Mutual Funds:- Mutual fund refers to a fund raised by a financial service company by pooling the saving of the public. The fund provides Investment Avenue for small investors. Who cannot Low riser, study returns high liquidity and better capital appreciation in the long-run. Association of Mutual funds in India (AMFI) data shows that assets of the Mutual Fund Industry have reached a size of Rs.14.21 trillion at the end of the August, 2015.

Venture Capital:- Venture Capital is a form of "risk capital". In other words, capital that is invested in a business where there is a substantial element of risk relating to the future creation of profits and cash flows. Risk capital is invested as 127

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 shares (equity) rather than as a loan and the investor requires a higher "rate of return" to compensate him for his risk. In 1995, Govt of India permitted Foreign Finance companies to make investments in India and many foreign VC private equity firms entered India. In 1996, government announced guidelines to regulate the VC industry. Though there were many shortcomings these guidelines were the starting point.

New products in foreign market:-New products have also emerged in the foreign market as of the developed countries. Some of these products are yet to make full entry in the Indian market.

Letter of credit:-It is an Innovation funding mechanism for the import of goods and services on offered payment terms. L 0 C is an arrangement of a financing institution bank of one country with another institution banking/agent to support. The export of goods and services the greatest advantage is that is saves a lot of time and money on mutual verification of benefiter source of finance.

The Indian financial services industry has undergone a metamorphosis since 1990. But during the period 2014-15,the total outstanding credit by scheduled Commercial Banks of India stood at Rs.72,606.11Billions. The economic liberalization has brought in a complete transformation in the Indian financial services industry. Prior to the economic liberalization, the Indian financial sector was characterized by so many factors.

Conclusion:

India is today one of the most vibrant global economies, on the back of robust banking and insurance sectors. The country is projected to become the Fifth largest banking sector globally by 2020. Bank credit has to grow at a Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) of 17 Per cent in the medium term leading to better credit penetration. India's digital payment industry is expected to grow by 10 times to reach US$500 Billion by 2020 and contribute 15 per cent of GDP. RBI has granted in principle licenses to 10 applicants to open small finance banks, which will help expanding access financial services in rural and semi-urban areas, thereby giving fillip to Prime Minister's financial inclusive initiative under Pradhan Manthri Jana Dhana Yojana (PMJDY), and 217 Million accounts have been opened and 174.6 million RuPay Debit cards have been issued. Government of India aims to extend insurance, pension and credit facilities to those excluded from these benefits under PMJDY.

128

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Government of India aims to extend insurance, pension and credit facilities to those excluded from these benefits under the Pradhana Mantri Jana dhana Yojana (PMJDY).To facilitate an easy access to finance by micro and small enterprises (MSEs), GOI/RBI has launched credit Guarantee Fund Scheme to provide guarantee cover of collateral free credit facilities extended to MSEs up to Rs.1 crore. Moreover, Micro Units Development and Refinance Agency (MUDRA) Ltd. were also established to refinance all micro finance Institutions.

References:

1. D.M.Mithani and Gardon-(Financial services,Banking and Insurance) 2. S.N.Maheswari and R.R.Paul(Banking and financial services) 3. Vasant Desai,,Khushpat S.Jain and Kavita Thakur(Financial services,Banking and Insurance)

129

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

130

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

131

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

132

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

133

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

134

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

135

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

136

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

137

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

138

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

139

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

140

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

141

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

142

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

143

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

144

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

145

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

146

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

147

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

CHANGE INHIBITING CULTURAL FACTORS MILCH CATTLE SCHEME IN AGENCY AREAS OF ANDHRA PRADESH: A STUDY ON JATAPU AND SAVARA TRIBES

Prof.Ch Bapu Haranath(Rtd) D. Ramesh Principal Investigator Asst. Professor S.G & U.G.C Major Research Project Co-Investigator Dept. of Anthropology U.G.C Major Research Project Andhra University, Visakhapatnam Dept. of Anthropology Andhra University, Visakhapatnam

Abstract

This paper is attempt of the authors to show how a well-designed programmes aimed at economic upflitment can met with failure owing to the interference of vital cultural elements i.e attitudes, religious beliefs, superstitions and life cycle ceremonies among the simple societies. It is based on the field study of the authors in the agency areas of Vizianagarma district and few agency villages of Srikakulam district in respect of introduction of miltch cattle scheme among the Jatapu and Savara tribes (PVTG). The field work is conducted in the agency villages of Gumalaxmipuram, Kurupam mandals and a few villages of seethampeta mandal. Anthropological methods are employed for data collection. The study revealed that the miltch animal scheme introduced in the area of study is a failure in spite of the economic advantage to the tribal groups owing to the involvement of vital cultural elements i.e, attitudes, belief systems, religious elements and life cycle ceremonies which hinder the implementation of miltch cattle scheme.

Key words: Cultural Factors, Miltch cattle, Savara, Jatapu

Introduction

The agency area of Vizianagaram and Srikakulam district of Andhra Pradesh is inhabited by Jatapus (cultivated tribe), Savara (Particularly Vulnerable Tribal Group), Konda Dora and other tribal communities. In terms of population Jatapu and Savara are the largest tribal communities in the Northern District of Andhra Pradesh. The area inhabited by these groups have experienced many revolts prior to independence as a result of non-tribal immigration into the agency and contact situation has the resulted in tribal misery on account of loss of control over their resources. The illiteracy, ignorance and primitive technology

148

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 of the tribals have resulted in their utter backwardness and the cunning nature of non-tribal exploitative elements in the form of liquor venders, money lenders and petty traders have relegated the tribal community a secondary position in their own environment and gradually the political leadership in the agency areas have shifted from the tribal chieftains to nontribal liquor venders. Noticing the plight of the tribal in the agency areas, much special protective legislation were brought in by the national leaders in Indian Constitution. And a duty is cast on the government for the welfare and development of tribal communities for their upliftment on par with the rest of the population. Accordingly many measures were taken up by the governments for their protections and welfare.

In spite of the government measures, the condition in the study area is not improved as per the expectations. In censed by the atrocities meted out to them, the otherwise peace loving tribal communities has revolted against authority in the area of study in late sixties s and early seventies which is popularly known as the Naxalite movement with the assistance of CPI (ML) party, and the study area became the epi center of the movement participated by the tribal communities of the area mainly belongs to Jatapu and Savara tribes which is considered by the international communists as yanan of India.

During the after math of Naxalite movement and realizing the plight of the tribals of the area, the Government has taken vigor steps for their protection and development. Agency land transfer regulation act (Act of 1959) and money lenders Act (1960) and debt relief regulation (1961) were implemented from 1970s by establishing special machinery for vigorous implementation and for land restoration to the affected tribals. Welfare and development programmes have been taken up in the agency areas through Girijan development agency during Fourth Five Year Plan Srikakulam and later by the integrated tribal development agencies, Parvathipuram and Seethampeta under as per new strategy from Fifth Five Year Plan onwards as mesolevel planning units. Various schemes of economic development, education, health, communication, and other welfare measures were initiated for the overall development of tribes.

Development of agriculture, horticulture, cashew plantation, sericulture, plough bullocks, miltch cattle, goat and sheep rearing units, poultry, and employment generation schemes such as fancy shops, kirana, cloth shops, cottage industries, tents, etc. were sanctioned to the tribal beneficiaries for their overall economic development. Though some of the schemes have shown positive results many other schemes have not successful as per the desire of the planners.

149

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Basing on the study of the implementation of economic development programmes in simple societies all over the world planners and social scientists have brought out the influence of socio-economic and cultural and psychological factors in the implementation of the programmes. Robertson and Foster basing on their experiences in the implementation of rural development programmes and also basing on several studies made by academicians, programme implementers, planners, have observed change inhibiting and promoting factors in programme implementation in the realm of socio-cultural and psychological arena. They caution the planners that the cultures are the integrated systems and not to be lightly torn apart though they stated the cultural, social and psychological barriers and stimulant to change exist in an economic setting, economic benefits alone cannot make a programme successful. The Columbian anthropologist Mrs Pineda has brought out the involvement of cultural factors involved in the high rate mortality in the rural areas of Columbia. Many health workers have reported that the religious beliefs and sacred text contribute to fatalistic attitudes affecting the health programmes.

S.C Dube has attributed the failure of adult education in India to the cultural factor of pride and dignity. Isbel Kelly based on her study in the agricultural programmes in the Mexico pointed out that the failure is due to with the above factor. Superstitions and beliefs are identified as an impeding factor for the failure of nutritional programmes by Jean Pinder. In addition many socio- psychological factors are identified by the academicians as affecting many development programmes in third world countries.

In spite of vigorous implementations of welfare and development programmes in the study area the results are not in commensurate with the huge amounts spent for the tribal development in the area under study. To identify the change inhibiting factors in the tribal culture, two tribal groups were selected for in-depth study and the authors have selected milch cattle scheme implemented by the ITDA among the Jatapu and Savara tribes on the model of Fosters study.

Methodology

Jatapu and Savara villages were selected through convenient sampling and the informants are randomly selected. Anthropological techniques of data collection like participant observation, unstructured interview, canvassing of schedules and collecting case studies, Genealogies were employed during the field work.

150

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

The Jatapu are the sixth largest Scheduled tribe in Andhra Pradesh with a population of 1, 18, 613 individuals (2001 census), inhabiting mainly in the agency areas of Vizianagaram and Srikakulam Districts of Andhra Pradesh. It is the dominant tribal group in Vizianagaram district and the third predominant group in Srikakulam District. Jatapu also inhabit in the adjoining Orissa state with their concentration in Koraput and Ganjam districts. Vizianagaram district comprises 75 percent of the Jatapu population in Andhra Pradesh with main concentration in the Mandal’s of Gumma laxmipuram and Kurupam, while 25 percent of them are residing in Srikakulam District with their concentration in Seethampeta Mandal.

The Jatapus believe in supernatural beings which have immense power to control over all the living beings. They feel that only through the prayers and sacrifices, they can be protected. There is a pantheon of Deities hierarchically arranged in their religious order. While some are the most powerful deities, the remaining are considered as less powerful deities. Jakaramma/Jakera Devata is the main goddess of the Jatapu tribe. Every Jatapu village has Jakera devata shrine in the center or east side of the village. The shrine comprises of two or three Spherical stones covered by rectangle plain stone slabs. Some of the earlier authors opined that the Jakaramma of Jatapu is none other than Jakersane of Khond tribe. The deities Agnigangamma of Neelavadi(Orissa) Majji Gowramma of Raighada (Orissa) Burada Polamma of Raighada, Desisaramma, Paidamma, Nukalamma, Mutyalamma/Gummaamdevata, Chintala Polamma of Devakona and Dabugari Talli of Devagiri (Orissa) are considered as her sisters. The Ammatalli/Asiramma of Paikipadi (Orissa) is considered as her father’s sister. The brother of Jakaramma is known as Pothuraju. In addition to above goddess, there are a number of hill deities named after the respective of the area.

Jatapu offering sacrifices to deities Detites Jakarama deity Cow sacrifices local knowns as “Bhakanu veyadam” to – cow jakaramma deity where in the meat of the sacrificial animal is cooked at the spot for communal feast. The tounge and heart of the sacrifice animal is buried under a mango tree. This sacrifice is offer to main deity for the protection of the tribe Mutyalamma – Mutyalamma is considered as the disease controlling deity and cow a cow is offered to her communally for her protection to ward of diseases. Thulasamma – If death is due to unknown or unexplained reasons, a cow is cow sacrificed for Thulasamma deity known as Gatlunadavadam to

151

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

propitiate the deity to ward of disease causing spirits to leave the village. Sandhi devatha To ward of small pox or chicken pox a cow sacrifice is offered – cow to the deity. A cow sacrifice is also offered to Ammathalli and Gumamdevatha for general protection Festivals and Life cycle ceremonies Kandhikotta The festival is performed before harvesting of red gram for festival (red which a cow is sacrificed communally for increased crops. gram) Tenkakotha The festival is performed in the mango season, for collection festival of the mango kernel to be used in lean season. To ward off evil effects of Mango kernel a cow is sacrificed. However, the consumption of mango kernel is not in vogue but the festival and sacrifice is continued till date.

Savara is the second largest tribal community in the study area and the largest tribal group in Srikakulam district of Andhra Pradesh. They are one of the largest communities in Ganjam district of Orissa. It is a particularly vulnerable tribal group and one of the autochthonous tribes of India. They are referred under various names, “Savara”, “Sourah”, “Sourah”, etc. They speak a dialect of the Austro Asiatic language Saora. The Savara’s religious functionaries have a much deeper knowledge of their religion and spiritual beliefs. Pareek observes that their prayers, long rituals, the art of conversation with gods, ghosts and spirts, shrines etc. all depict a deep religious culture. There is a pantheon of gods like Andangsom (kite god), Ahorsasum (snake god), Alambsom (Fever and rickets), Baysom (God of Madness), Dorisom (God of cattle grassers), Edangsum (Gog of Fuel wood), Gadalsum (God of thatch grass) and Gajjisum (God of Itch).

Sacrifices of animals including miltch cattle offered to deities in all religious events, social functions and the life cycle ceremonies. The animal sacrifices are more rampant among Savaras than among Jatapus. During the seventh month of pregnancy, a buffalo is offered as sacrifice to Snake god and a pig is offered to Sun god to make delivery easy (Suryanarayan 1970). For naming ceremony, a cow is offered to the Kuddipuran deity to appease a deity. Buffalo sacrifice is performed during Guar ceremony which is most elaborate and most expanse ritual. Suryanarayana (1970) reported that the ceremony is performed in support of all the souls of the dead in their Kulam marangi group (lineage unit) to be admitted to the company of dead ancestors to enable the souls to rest permanently in ancestor abode. In the ceremony (now called Agam) a

152

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 buffalo is to be sacrificed in honor of each dead and all lineage members must contribute for the ceremony to meet the expenditure. Among the Savaras if there is a death in the sisters house, it is an obligatory for an individual to bring a buffalo before Guar ceremony to express his solidarity. In addition Karja festival is also performed for their dead relatives which is now on the decline.

In many social occasions like marriage cows are slaughtered for the communal feast. In case of elopement or maganalli (taking the wife of another men) which is known as dandaboia a cow is slaughtered for communal feast, the expenditure is to be met by the offender. During the recent times it was reported that owing to the conversion of Savaras into Christianity, the animal sacrifices are on decline but however, as per the observation of the authors that the sacrifices are still in vogue among the Savaras especially during danda boi and agam festivals. A few Akshara brahma temples are started especially in Seethampeta mandal which prohibited the animal sacrifices but without any significant impact.

One such economic development programme initiated in the agency areas of the study is the introduction of the mitch animal scheme. This scheme played an important role the development of rural economy and Andhra Pradesh which is one of the largest milk producing the states in the country. It was estimated that a few lakhs families depending on livestock for their livelihood which has attained the status of agro-based industry, generating economic growth, gainful employment and livelihood in the rural areas of state. Encouraged by the successfulness of the programme in the rural areas of state, the ITDAS have introduced Miltch Animal schemes in the agency areas for tribals and since their inception. Miltch buffaloes, cows were sanctioned to tribal beneficiaries with 50 per cent subsidy. Since the average milk yield is two liters for non-descriptive cows and Miltch Buffaloes, the programme planners and the implementation authorities hoped that this programme will be helpful for the beneficiaries in economic development. Milk collection centers were established at certain points in the agency areas so as to provide remunerative price for the milk/milk products. In recent years cross breed cows (Jercy variety) were supplied mainly to Savaras. It was estimated that since the milk yield is seven liters per cow as against two liters for non-descriptive cows, the project authority hoped that the introduction of the cross breed cows in the agency, will help the tribal beneficiary immensely.

The study reveals that this scheme is a failure in the agency villages inhabited by the Jatapus and Savaras. As regards to the introduction of CB cows, this scheme is a decimal failure. In fifteen villages of the study area not even a single CB cow survived. The milk collection centers became defunct and the

153

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 aspiration of the project authority is not fulfilled. One of the main reasons identified for the failure is, the dietary habits of the tribals who do not consume milk or milk products in their diet. The study revealed that the religious elements also played a crucial role in the failure of the programme since the Jatapus and Savaras considered it as a sin (sentiment) to prevent the calves from the drinking adequate milk. Unlike the rural areas, the tribals do not take care of miltch cattle in the form of specialized feed and special attention. The practice in the tribal area is that the animals have to fend for themselves and this coupled with unsuitable environment resulted in death of the CB cows.

The study revealed that among the both the communities i.e Jatapu and Savara the offer of animal sacrifices to their pantheon of gods and goddesses for various events and slaughtering of milch animals for communal feast for all social occasions is a major contributing factor for the failure of the scheme. Though the community elders state that the Government sanctioned miltch animals are not offered by them for sacrifices for which they purchased them in the shandies, the field observation did not support the above claim.

The very idea of the Government to supply miltch buffaloes, cows (traditional varieties) and cross breed cows to the communities which offer animal sacrifices to the pantheon of gods, and slaughtering of animals in all social events is inappropriate. References

1. GM Foster (1962): Traditional societies and Technological changes. 2. Dube, S.C (1977): Tribal Heritage of India (edited) Vikas Publishing House Pvt., New Delhi. 3. Elwin Verrier (1957): A Philosophy for N.E.F.A published by Sachin Ray, Calcutta. 4. Haranath CB (2006): The dynamics of land alienation among the Jatapus of Andhra Pradesh (unpublished Ph.D thesis). 5. Kelly, Isabel (1953): Informe preliminar del Proyecto de habitacion en La Laguna, Ejido de El Cuije, Cercano a Torreon, Coahuila.” Mimeographed. Mexico, D.F: Instituto de Asuntos Inter-americanos. 6. Pineda, Virginia Gutierrez de (1955): Causes cultures de la mortalidad infantile, Revista Colombiana de Antropologia, 4:13-85. 7. Department of Anthropology and TCR & TI collaborative study (2008): The Jatapus of Andhra Pradesh. 8. Department of Anthropology and TCR&TI collaborative study (2010): An evaluation of a study the Primitive tribal groups of Adilabad district.

154

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

LEGAL PROTECTION TO WOMEN VICTIMS: ACID ATTACKS

Dr.I.Ramasundari Prof.Dr.N.B.Chandrakala Associate Professor Department .of Law M.R.V.R.G.R. College of Law Sri Padmavathi Mahila University Vizianagaram Tirupati

A.Gowreeswari Research Scholar Sri Padmavathi Mahila University, Tirupati

One of the most striking features of the Indian scene is the massive ignorance of the people of their legal right, it is signal to all the wise men to focus their attention and grid up their lions in the sacred mission guarantying in practice justice to women victims.

Today the issue of acid attack is gained gigantic proportions. Acid attacks are one of the most heinous crimes against women. According to the National Crime Records Bureau, 222 cases of acid attacks were reported in 2015, Statistics reveals the case of women sufferers of acid attacks is increasing1.

Reasons for Acid Attacks:-

The main cause of acid attacks is egos of men and women, rejection of the marriage proposal or sexual advances, dowry problem, property issues, family disputes, love failures, criminal opines. Occasionally acid attacks may occur due to social or political or religious beliefs. Unfortunate women are resorting to suicide as she is not in a position to speak out to others and to lead a life of respect and dignity in society.

The Justice Verma committee constituted by the Central Govt. in 2013 observed the acid attack is the most heinous form of attack on women and suggested reforms in the criminal justice system.

The 226 report of the Law Commission of India stated “Though acid attack is a crime which can be committed against any man or woman, In India they have been committed on women particularly young women for rejecting the proposals of marriage for denying dowry. The attacker cannot bear the fact that

1 .times of india.com 155

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 he has been rejected and seeks to destroy the body of the woman who has dared to stand up to him.

Constitutional Provisions:-

Article 21 guarantees the Right to life and Liberty of every individual. Right to life includes right to live with dignity of all including victims of acid attack. State has to protect the dignity of the woman.

Legislative Provisions:-

Acid attacks by themselves have been recognized as offences under the Indian Penal Code for which punishment is prescribed. By virtue of Criminal Law (Amendment Act),2013 sections 326-A and 326-B2 were inserted in the Indian Penal Code providing for punishment to anyone who causes permanent or partial damage or deformity to or burns or mains or disfigures person or causes grievous hurt by throwing acid or by administering acid to that person, or by using any other means with the intention of causing or with the knowledge that he is likely to cause such injury or hurt shall be punished with imprisonment of not less than 10 years but which may extend to imprisonment for life and with fine. The fine will be paid to the victim.

Section 326-B - Voluntarily throwing or attempting to throw acid:-

Whoever throws or attempts to throw acid on any person or attempts to administer acid to any person with an intention of causing permanent or partial damage or deformity to or burns or mains or disfigures person or causes grievous hurt shall be punished with imprisonment for a period of 5 to 7 years and shall also be liable to fine.

Explanation -1

“Acid was defined to include any substance which was acidic or corrosive character or burning nature that is capable of causing bodily injury leading to scars or disfigurement or temporary or permanent disability.

Explanation – 2 Under section 326-A permanent or partial damage or deformity shall not be required irreversible.

2 . Inserted by The Criminal Law Amendment Act,2013 (Act No.13 of 2013) w.e.f.03.02.2013 156

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

In 2008, the Criminal Procedure Code was amended. The Code of Criminal Procedure (Amendment) Act, 2008 (Act 5 of 2009)3 has added section 357-A dealing with victim compensation Scheme. By this amendment every state government in co-ordination with the Central Government are required to prepare a scheme for the protection of women victims. This added provision will now be an important tool in the hand of activist to push forward for victim compensation.

 Whenever a recommendation is made by the court for the compensation the amount of compensation to be awarded will be decided by State and District Legal Services Authorities  Trial court may recommend for rehabilitation of victims and compensation.  Where the offender is not traced or identified but the victim is identified and where no trial takes place the victim or his dependants may make an application to the State and District Legal Services Authorities for the award of compensation.  The Authorities on receipt of the applications from victims shall hold an enquiry and complete it within two months to award the compensation and may order for First Aid facility or Medical benefit at free of cost.

Section 357-B - Compensation to be in addition to the fine under section 326- A or Section 376-D of the Indian Penal Code (45 of 1860)

The compensation payable by the state govt under section 357-A shall be in addition to the payment of fine to the victim under 326-A or Section 376-B of Indian Penal Code.

Section 357-C- Treatments of Victims:-

All hospitals, Public or Private, whether run by the central or state govts, local bodies or any other person shall immediately provide for the First Aid facility or Medical benefit at free of cost to the victims of any offence covered under section 326-A ……. And shall immediately inform the police of such an incident.

3 . Sections 357-A &357-B of Cr.P.C inserted by Act 13 of 2013, S 23 (w.e.f.03.02.2013)

157

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Role of Judiciary to prevent acid attacks

The Honorable Supreme Court of India in Laxmi vs. Union of India,4 directed orders to Governments, Private Hospitals to provide care and treatment to the victims of acid attacks. The court emphasized measures to prohibit selling of Acid subject to proper entries in the Register by seller containing the details of persons to whim acid is / are sold and the quantity sold. Proper care / treatment to the victims by State Govts / Union Territories.

Obliging private hospitals to provide treatment to victims, full treatment including medicines, food, bedding and reconstructive surgeries. Actions against hospitals / Clinics for refusal to treat the victims of acid attacks and other crimes in contravention of the provisions of the Section 357-C of the Code of Criminal Procedure.

The Supreme court in Parivartan Kendra Another Vs. Union of India,5 observed that the state and union territory concerned can give even more amount of compensation than Rs.3,00,000 /- as was directed in the Lakshmi’s case.

Central Victim Compensation Fund Scheme6 :-

Taking note of the fact that acid attack victims need to undergo a series of plastic surgeries and other corrective treatments. The Govt has introduced CVCF scheme with an initial corpus of Rs.200 crores to enable, support to the victims of rape, acid attacks, human trafficking and women killed or injured in the cross border firing. Funds to be released basing on the female population and crime report of States.

National Legal Services Authority (NALSA) :-

National Legal Services Authority prepared a scheme for grant of compensation, financial support to the poor victims of acid attacks, the Supreme Court approved scheme for mandatory grant of compensation to the victims. A bench of Justice Madan B.Lokur and Deepak Gupta said the scheme would be enforced in all the states and union territories and directed the centre to forward it to all govts. The object of the scheme is to ensure that the victims of acid attacks are appropriately rehabilitated in the society and live a life of dignity. As per

4 . Laxmi vs. Union of India,4 W.P (Civil) No.129/2006 5 . Parivartan Kendra Another Vs. Union of India,5 W.P (Civil No.867 of 2013) 6 . http: // www.ncw.nic.in

158

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 scheme, in case of victims of burning and acid attacks, the minimum compensation will be Rs.7,00,000/- for total disfigurement and Rs.5,00,000/- incase of 50% burns , Rs.1,00,000/- shall be paid within 15 days to an acid attack victim and thereafter Rs.2,00,000/- within two months.

The objectives of the NALSA (Legal Services to the victims of Acid Attacks) scheme 2016 are 7:-

1. To strengthen legal aid and legal representation at the National, State , District and Taluka levels for the victims of acid attacks in availing the benefits of the various legal provisions and scheme for compensation 2. To enable the victims to get access to the medical facilities and rehabilitative services 3. To create and spread awareness about the entitlements of the victims of acid attacks through the DLSA, TLSA, Panel Lawyers, Para Legal Volunteers and legal service clinics. 4. Organization of Training, Orientation and sensitization programmers by the legal persons, Police, NGOs.

The Member Secretaries of the State Legal Service Authorities were also directed to give wide and adequate publicity in the State and Union Territories to the victim compensation scheme so that each acid attack victim can take the benefit of the scheme.

The ultimate object of the scheme is to ensure that the victims of acid attacks are appropriately rehabilitated in the society and live a life of dignity.

Conclusion:-

First and foremost, the victims of acid attacks must be given medical treatment. She has to be enabled to get over the shock and regain as balanced state of mind. Today, the people’s consciousness has been aroused and a hue and cry is raised at such injustice. The life and honor of women victims to be protected. Stringent punishments to be imposed to accused persons and sympathy towards such victim is the way to prevent crime against women victims. The major problem in implementation of Victim Compensation Scheme is lack of awareness. The voice of media to propagate laws, schemes of Govt in general and women is a minute welcome step.

7 . https://nalsa.gov.in 159

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

IMPACT OF MGNREGS ON THE SOCIO-ECONOMIC CONDITIONS OF THE RURAL PEOPLE IN CHITTOOR DT. A.P. – AN ANALYSIS

Dr. C. Malleswaramma Dr. N.Murali Senior Accountant Associate Professor of Commerce Municipal Office Government Degree College Puttur Puttur

The impact of any scheme can be analyzed on the basis socio economic conditions like age, gender, social identity, size of the family, occupations of the respondents, type of accommodation they are residing, ownership of homes, the number of family members enrolled in job cards, cooking amenities in use, possession of electronic devices, access to health care, educational opportunities and the type of schooling of the respondents children, ownership of land, migration, duration and pattern of migration, average annual income, average annual expenditure on consumption, average savings and the medium of saving, average debts and the institutions from which loans are borrowed and the average working days available to the respondent households etc. The following is the analysis presented pertaining to the impact of MGNREGS in chittoor Dist.

 Age wise respondents in the sample revenue divisions Age is one of the prime indicators of the demographic characteristic. It gives how the respondents act on experience, maturity, risk-taking and decision making capacity. The age of the respondents is presented in Table 1 and Fig 1. Among the sample respondents in Chittoor revenue division 42% belong to 30- 40 years of age group and 24% belong to 20-30 years age group. In Tirupati and Madanapalle revenue divisions 30-40 years age group respondents are more in number followed by 20-30 years of age group. Table -1 Age wise Respondents (Source: Field data.)

Age Revenue Divisions Total (years) Chittoor Tirupati Madanapalle 20-30 19(24.05) 22(24.18) 30(29.70) 71(26.20) 30-40 33(41.77) 37(40.66) 35(34.65) 105(38.75) 40-50 14(17.72) 18(19.78) 18(17.82) 50(18.45) 50-60 10(12.66) 10(10.99) 13(12.87) 33(12.17) Above 60 03(3.39) 04(4.39) 05(4.95) 12(4.43) Total 79(100) 91(100) 101(100) 271

160

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Fig. 1: Age wise Respondents

AGE WISE RESPONDENTS

37 33 35 30 22 19 18 18 14 13 10 10 3 4 5

20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 Above 60

Chittoor Tirupati Madanapalli

Table-1A ANOVA Results for Age Wise Respondents

Source of Variatio SS df MS F P-value F crit Result n Age 1703.6 4 425.9 79.60748 1.77E-06 3.837853 Significant Revenue Divisions 48.53333 2 24.26667 4.535826 0.048223 4.45897 Significant Error 42.8 8 5.35 Total 1794.933 14 Source: Compiled from Table -1.

Analysis of variance is calculated for the age groups and revenue divisions. The results show that it is significant at 5 percent probability level.

 Gender-wise classification of sample beneficiaries  The gender composition is very important factor in the demographic profile of the respondents. It is also important to implement reservation and promotions. The gender composition of the respondents is presented in Table-.2 and Fig.2. It shows that more male respondents are the beneficiaries than female respondents in each mandal.

161

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Table - 2 Gender wise Respondents in select Revenue Divisions Gender Revenue Divisions Total Percentage Chittoor Tirupati Madanapalle 44 49 56 Male 149 54.98 (55.70) (53.85) (55.45) 35 42 45 Female 122 45.02 (44.30) (46.15) (43.56) 79 91 101 271 Total (100) (100) (100) (100) Source: Field data.

The gender wise classification of respondents reveals that male respondents are more in number i.e. 56%, 54% and 55% in Chittoor, Tirupati, Madanapalle revenue divisions respectively. In total number of sample beneficiaries of 271. 55% are male beneficiaries and 45% are female beneficiaries. Hence, MGNREGS scheme attacked more number of male than the female.

Fig. 2: Gender wise Respondents in select Revenue Divisions

56 49 45 60 44 42 35 40

20

0 Chittoor Tirupati Madaapalli

Male Female

 Family member-wise distribution of respondents in the select divisions Obviously, the family size will have its influence on the standard of living. Family members involve in every financial aspect and it responds to the financial conditions of the particular family. The data pertaining to the size of the family of the respondents are presented in Table-3 and Fig.3.

162

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Table - 3 Family-Wise classification of Sample Beneficiaries

Size of the Revenue Divisions Total Family Chittoor Tirupati Madanapalle 55 60 62 177 1-3(small) (69.62 (65.93) (61.39) (65.31) 17 24 26 67 4-6(medium) (21.52) (26.37) (25.74) (24.72) Above 07 07 13 27 6(large) (8.86) (7.69) (12.87) (9.96) 79 91 101 271 Total (100) (100) (100) (100) Source: Field data. It is observed from the table that the Chittoor revenue division consists of more number of sample respondents i.e. 70 percent in family size of 1-3 numbers followed by 66 percent in Tirupati revenue division and 61 percent in Madanapalle revenue division. The beneficiaries from 4-6 size of the family are more in Tirupati revenue division followed by Madanapalle and Chittoor divisions. The family size of above 6 members is significant in the case of Madanapalle revenue division. Among the total number of sample beneficiaries of MGNREGA majority beneficiaries are from 1-3 family size group.

Fig.3: Family-Wise classification of Sample Beneficiaries

1-3 (small) 4-6 (medium) Above 6 (Large)

163

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

1-3 (small) 4-6 (medium) Above 6 (Large)

1-3 (small) 4-6 (medium) Above 6 (Large)

Table-3 A ANOVA Results for Family-Size of Sample Respondents Source of Variatio SS df MS F P-value F crit Result n Size of 4022.222 2 2011.111 583.871 1.17E-05 6.944272 Significant Family Revenue 80.88889 2 40.44444 11.74194 0.021182 6.944272 Significant Divisions Error 13.77778 4 3.444444

Total 4116.889 8

Source: Compiled from Table-3. Analysis of variance is calculated for family size and revenue divisions. The results shows that it is significant at 5% probability level.  OCCUPATION-WISE DISTRIBUTION OF SAMPLE BENEFICIARIES

Occupation is the activity which gives life supporting amenities.

164

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Different people have different occupations for the sustenance of their life. The occupation particulars of the sample beneficiaries are presented in the Table- 4 and Fig.4. Table -4 Occupation-Wise Distribution of Respondents Revenue Divisions Occupation Total Chittoor Tirupati Madanapalle 39 45 50 134 Wages Labour (49.36) (49.45) (49.50) (49.45) Agriculture 22 27 30 79 Labour (27.85) (29.67) (29.70) (29.15) 05 5 10 20 Live stock (6.33) (5.49) (9.90) (7.38) 13 14 11 38 Self employed (16.46) (15.38) (10.89) (14.02) Total 90(100) 91(100) 101(100) 271

Source: Field data.

Fig.4: Occupation-Wise Distribution of Respondents 50 50 45 45 39 40 35 30 30 27 25 22 20 13 14 15 1011 10 5 5 5 0 Chittoor Tirupati Madaapalli

Wages Labour Agriculture Labour Live stock MadanapalleSelf employed

165

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Occupation factor decides the maturity level of any person and it decides the intensity of need towards the aids from the government and other sources. Hence, the respondents are classified according to their occupation also.

In all the revenue divisions wage labour is dominating among all the occupations taken for analysis. In Madanapalle 50 respondents with 49.50% belong to wage labour, 45 respondents (49.45%) from Tirupati and 39 respondents with 49.36% from Chittoor. Wages labours are the persons working for wages only in terms of cash. Then the agriculture labour that are with the work for agriculture needs of mutual necessities of co-farmers in the division. They are the second dominant place in all the divisions. Majority are from Tirupati i.e. 27 (29.67%),followed by Madanapalle with 25(29.15%) and Chittoor with 22(27.85%). In total the wage labour is more in number i.e. 134 (49.45%) followed by agriculture labour 79 respondents with 29.15%. Live stock respondents are the least among the all respondents. Third dominant role is by self employed group. The self employed is the deserving group for MGNREGA scheme.

 Job card wise distribution of respondents in the selected Revenue Divisions: Table-5 and Fig.5 demonstrates the number of members of a family of respondents enrolled in job cards. Job card wise distribution displays their standard of living. The enrolment in job card also presents their interest in taking job work towards employability. Table- 5 Respondents on the basis of job card distribution Number of Revenue Divisions family members Chittoor Tirupati Madanapall Total enrolled in job e card 63 70 73 206 1-2 Members (79.75) (76.92) (72.28) (76.01) 11 14 18 43 3-4 Members (13.92) (15.38) (17.82) (15.87) 5 7 10 22 5-6 Members (6.33) (7.69) (9.90) (8.12) Total 79 91 101 271

Source: Field data.

166

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Fig.5 Respondents on the basis of job card distribution

CHITTOOR

6% 14%

80%

1-2 Members 3-4 Members 5-6 Members

TIRUPATI

8%

15%

77%

1-2 Members 3-4 Members 5-6 Members

MADANAPALLE

10%

18%

72%

1-2 Members 3-4 Members 5-6 Members

167

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

In Chittoor division the number of families with 1 to 2 members holding job card is 63 (79.75 %), number of families with 3 to 4 members holding job card is 11 (13.92%) and the number of families with 5 to 6 members holding job card is 5 (6.33%). In Tirupathi, number of families with 1 to 2 members holding job card is 70 (76.92%), number of families with 3 to 4 members holding job card is 14 (15.38 %) and the number of families with 5 to 6 members holding job card is 7 (7.69%). In Madanapalle, number of families with 1 to 2 members holding job card is 73 (72.28%), number of families with 3 to 4 members holding job card is 18 (17.82%) and the number of families with 5 to 6 members holding job card is 10(9.90 %).

In Chittoor district, out of the 271 families 206 (76.01%) families with 1 to 2 members possess job-cards. Families with 3 to 4 members possessing Job- cards are found to be high in Chittoor. The lowest being Tirupati with 14(15.38%). Madanapalle tops in term of families with 5 to 6 members possessing job cards (9.90%), the lowest being Tirupati with 15.38 %. It is clear that families with 1 to 2 members holding job cards are more among all the respondents. Among the total number of respondents in the district 43 respondents are with job cards in the category of 3 to 4 members.

 Type of house dwelling by the beneficiaries in select divisions

House is one of the basic amenities and is essential for the sustenance of human life. The type of dwelling one possesses indicates once economic class and is also an indicator of the social status of the people. The detail of the type of dwelling of the respondent is presented Table-6 and Fig.6.

Table-6 Type of House Dwelling in Chittoor District Type of Revenue Divisions Total Dwelling Chittoor Tirupati Madanapalle Thatched 24 21 19 64 Hut (30.38) (23.08) (18.81) (23.62) Kuccha 27 33 42 102 House (44.30) (36.26) (41.58) (37.64) 28 37 40 105 Pucca house (22.12) (40.66) (39.60) (38.74) 79 91 101 271 Total (100) (100) (100) (100)

Source: Field data. 168

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Fig.6: Type of House Dwelling in Chittoor District 50 42 40 40 37 33 27 28 30 24 21 19 20

10

0 Chittoor Tirupati Madaapalli

Thatched Hut Kuccha House Pucca house

In Chittoor 24(30.38%) respondents are residing in thatched huts, 27(44.30%) are residing in Kuccha House, and 28(22.12%) are residing in pucca houses. In Tirupathi 21(23.08%) respondents are residing in thatched huts, 33(36.26%) and 37(40.66%) respondents are residing in kuchha and in pucca houses respectively. In Madanapalle 19(18.81%) respondents are residing in thached houses, 42 (41.58%) and 40(39.60%) respondents are residing in kuccha and pucca houses respectively.

In the total number of sample beneficiaries out of 271, 64(23.62%) have thatched hut dwelling, 102(37.64%) kutcha houses, and 105(38.74%) Pucca houses. The highest number of kutcha house dwellers are found in Madanapalle 42, 27 being found in Chittoor and 33 respondents residing in Kuccha House are in Tirupati. The highest number of pucca house dwellers is found in Tirupathi. The significant to note is that in all the divisions, the number of pucca house dwellers are 207 and the pucca house dwellers in Madanapalle and in the district is same which is at 39.60%. It is concluded that a dominant majority of respondents are living in kuccha houses.

 Respondents having the house title in the select Revenue Divisions The information on whether the respondents posses own house or are residing in rented house has elicited and presented in the Table-7 and Fig.7.

169

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Table-7 Respondents having the house title in the Sample Revenue Divisions

Type of Revenue Divisions Title of the Madanapall Total Chittoor Tirupati home e 59 72 77 208 Own (74.68) (79.12) (76.24) (76.75) 20 19 24 63 Rent (25.32) (20.88) (23.76) (23.24) 79 91 101 Total 271 (100) (100) (100)

Source: Field data.

Fig.7: Respondents having the house title in the Sample Revenue Divisions

77 80 72 70 59 60 50 40 30 24 20 19 20 10 0 Chittoor Tirupati Madaapalli Own Rent

The table demonstrates that in Chittoor revenue division 59 respondents possess own houses with 74.68%, only 20 are residing in rented houses with 25.32%. In Tirupathi revenue division 72 respondents have own houses 19 are residing (20.88%) in rented houses. In Madanapalle revenue division, 77 respondents have own houses, only 24(23.7%) are residing in rented houses.

Out of the 271 sample respondents, most remarkably, 208 possess own homes, only 63 are living in rented homes. Interestingly, in Madanapalle and

170

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

overall percentage of respondents having own house is nearly the same.

Table-7A

ANOVA Results for House Title of Sample Respondents Source of Variatio SS df MS F P-value F crit Result n House Title 3504.167 1 3504.167 107.2704 0.009194 18.51282 Significant Revenue Divisions 121.3333 2 60.66667 1.857143 0.35 19 Insignificant Error 65.33333 2 32.66667 Total 3690.833 5 Source: Compiled from Table-7.

Analysis of variance is calculated for house title and revenue divisions. The results show that land ownership is significant at 5 % level.

171

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

ROLE OF MGNREGS IN LIVELIHOOD OF RURAL PEOPLE IN CHITTOOR DT. AN ANALYSIS

Dr. C. Malleswaramma Senior Accountant Municipal Office Puttur

Income is the prime indicator of the standard of living of the respondents. The details of average income of sample beneficiaries before availing Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme (MGNREGS) and after availing MGNREGS are presented in Table-1 and Fig.1.

Before MGNREGS After Percentage of Mandals (Rs.) MGNREGS (Rs.) increase

Chittoor 86,060 1,24,360 44.50

Tirupati 1,08,240 1,38,430 27.80

Madanapalle 91,060 1,36,560 49.97 Average Annual 95,120 1,33,117 39.95 income Source: Field Data.

Fig. 1: Average Annual Income of Sample MGNREGS

49.97 44.50 50.00% 40.00% 27.80 30.00% 20.00% 10.00% 0.00% Chittoor Tirupati Madanapalli

172

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Before the inclination of the support of MGNREGS in the Chittoor district, average income of the respondents is Rs.86, 060. It is Rs.1, 08,240 for Respondents in Tirupati. In Madanapalle, it is Rs.91, 060. Overall, in District, the average annual income is Rs.95, 120. Tirupati mandal is on the top in terms of the average annual income of the respondents, Chittoor mandal is at the bottom (RS.86, 060). There is increase in the annual average income of the MGNREGS beneficiaries, i.e. in Chittoor revenue division the percentage increase is 45, it is 28 and 50 in Tirupati and Madanapalle revenue divisions. The percent of increase in the Chittoor district is 40. Table-1 A ANOVA Results for Average Annual Income of Sample Respondents Source of Variatio SS df MS F P-value F crit Result n In Mandals 328800833.3 2 164400416.7 5.604429101 0.151414 19 significant Income 2165620012 1 2165620017 73.8262353 0.013276 18.5128205 Significant Error 58668033.33 2 29334016.67

Total 2553088883 5

Source: Compiled from Table-1 Table-1 B T- Test Paired Two Sample for Means Value Variable 1 Variable 2 Mean 95120 133116.6667 Variance 135350800 58383633.33 Observations 3 3 Pearson Correlation 0.759698652 Hypothesized Mean 0 Difference Df 2 t Stat -8.592219463 P(T<=t) one-tail 0.006638088 t Critical one – tail 2.91998558 P(T<=t) two – tail 0.013276176 T critical two - tail 4.30265273 Source: Compiled from Table-1. The analysis of variance is calculated for divisions and income. The results show the improvement in income, is significant at 5% level.

173

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Table- 2 Social and Economic Impact of Sample MGNREGS Social S. No Number Percentage Economic Number Percentage Benefit 1 Benefited 152 56 Benefited 179 66

Not Not 2 119 44 92 34 Benefited Benefited

Total 271 100 271 100 Source: Field Data.Fig.2 : Social and Economic Impact of Sample

36

64

Improved Not Improved

MGNREGS

Details relating to social and economic impact of sample MGNREGS beneficiaries are presented in Table-1 and Fig.1. Out of the total number of beneficiaries in Chittoor district 56% got social benefit by way of access to essential commodities and other items needed for them. However 44 % of sample beneficiaries felt that they are unable to get any social benefit due to MGNREGS. It is noteworthy to say that 66% of sample MGNREGS beneficiaries in Chittoor district expressed that they are economically benefited by the MGNREGS. The remaining 34 percent expressed their view that the MGNREGS not benefited them economically. Hence the formulated hypothesis the Scheme may also help to improve the social status of the rural poor families due to increased earnings, is accepted .

174

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Table – 3 - Role of MGNREGA in Eradicating Rural Poverty in Chittoor District Number of Sl. No Rural Poverty Percentage Respondents

Helped to Eradicate 1 157 58 Rural Poverty Not Helped Eradicate 2. 114 42 Rural Poverty Total 271 100 Source: Field Data.

Fig.3: Role of MGNREGA in Eradicating Rural Poverty in Chittoor District

36

64

Improved Not Improved

Table-3 and Fig.3 presents the role of MGNREGA in eradicating rural poverty in Chittoor district. The study- reveals that out of 271 beneficiaries 58% felt that the MGNREGA helped them to eradicate their poverty to certain extent. However 42% of the total MGNREGS respondents are of the opinion that the scheme not helped them in eradicating poverty. The reasons are unable to get timely wages and unable to have 100 man days for the specified work. Hence, the formulated hypothesis MGNERGS may be an effective poverty alleviation programme as it is intended to provide a guaranteed employment for a minimum of one hundred days to poor people who seek employment and also guarantees a minimum wage, is accepted.

175

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Table- 4 - Development Role Played by MGNREGA in Chittoor District

Number of Sl. No Development Percentage Respondents 1 Asset Creation 87 32

2 Employment Creation 184 68 Total 271 100 Source: Field Data.

Fig.4: Development Role Played by MGNREGA in Chittoor District

36

64

Improved Not Improved

Implementation of MGNREG scheme should show some impact in the creation of assets and employment generation. After the implementation of MGNREG scheme in Chittoor district, considerable improvement was witnessed in the asset creation and employment generation. 68% of total MGNREGA beneficiaries expressed their view that the scheme generated employment for short period. Only 32% are of the opinion that the MGNREGA played on important role in the creation of assets. The details are presented in Table-4 and Fig.4. Hence, the formulated The MGNEREGS may prove to be an economic boon to the rural poor as it provides a guaranteed employment and minimum wage, is accepted

176

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Table- 5 - Role of MGNREGA in Improving the Life Standard of the Rural Poor S. No Life Standard Number of Respondents Percentage

1 Improved 173 64 2 Not Improved 98 36 Total 271 100 Source: Field Data. Fig 5. Role of MGNREGA in Improving the Life Standard of the Rural Poor

36

64

Improved Not Improved

All the rural development schemes are aimed at improving the standard of rural poor. When the role of MGNREGA in improving the life standard of the rural poor is examined 64% of the sample of MGNREGS agreed that the MGNREGA played an important role in improving their life standard. But 36% of the total sample MGNREGS felt that their life standard is not influenced by the MGNREGA. Table-5. and Fig.5 show the role of MGNREGS in improving the life standard of sample MGNREGS beneficiaries in Chittoor district.

When the sample responds are enquired about problems like corruption, Apathy of officials more than 60% expressed that they are experienced with the problems. So the formulated hypothesis that ‘the respondent’s may be facing problems like corruption, apathy of officials etc. as the Scheme is implemented on a massive scale in every village and monitoring of the work is impossible’, is accepted As the MGNREGS programme helped in improving the life standard of the rural poor the formulated hypothesis. ‘The MGNREGS may prove to be a beneficial programme in general in the perception of the rural poor respondents’.

177

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE OF SANGAM DAIRY THROUGH RATIO ANALYSIS

Shiril Bhanu Shaik Prof. D.A.R.Subrahmanyam Research Scholar Principal Department of Commerce and Mahatma Gandhi College Management Studies Guntur Acharya Nagarjuna University Nagarjuna Nagar, Guntur

Abstract

Financial performance is done to evaluate capability, stability and profitability of the company. Financial analysis helps investors to appraise whether they should invest in a particular company or not. The main objective of this study is to know the short term and long term financial position of the company and to know the profit level of the company. It is analyzed using short term, long term and profitability ratios for the period 2007- 2017, based on the secondary data that is balance sheet and profit/loss account. The company has to stabilize its income without much increase in operating expenses.

Keywords: Financial analysis, Ratio analysis, Stability and Profitability

INTRODUCTION

India’s milk production in 2016-17 rose by 18.81% as compared to 2013-14 while the per capita availability of milk increased from 307 gm/day in 2013-14 to 351 gm/day in 2016-17. The increase in milk production significantly increased the dairy farmers’ income. India’s dairy sector offers numerous possibilities for entrepreneurs across the globe. On the occasion of National Milk Day on Sunday, Union Agriculture & Farmers’ Welfare Minister, Radha Mohan Singh said that the milk production has increased significantly from 137.7 million tonnes in 2013-14 to 164 million tonnes in 2016-17. Similarly, the per capita availability of milk increased from 307 grams in 2013-14 to 351 grams in 2016- 17. Annual growth rate of Milk Production during the period 2011-14 was 4%, which has increased to 6% during 2014-17. The annual growth rate of world milk production has increased by 2% during 2014-17.

The Minister said that a National Action Plan Vision-2022 is being prepared to fill the gaps in the infrastructure required to handle the increased coverage and

178

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 milk production not only to meet the demand of milk and milk products but also to fulfil the objective of doubling the farmers’ income.

Andhra Pradesh (New Capital Amaravathi) is one of the 29 states in India. The primary occupation of the people in Andhra Pradesh is agriculture. The total reported population of Andhra Pradesh is 4.97 crores. People of rural areas and the landless agricultural labours take up dairying as a source of supplementary income.

REVIEW OF LITERATURE Hung et al., (2013) conducted a study in Vietnam and observed that rural livelihood augmentation has long been a crucial challenge for the effectiveness of Vietnamese government policies in agricultural sector. The results of the study revealed that farmers face the constraints of high input prices, feed scarcity, exploitation by downstream actors, capital investment inadequacy, inadequate poor market information and knowledge, lack of technical support from dairy manufacturer and local authority, land limit, and cow diseases.

Rajiv Kumar and Dr.Rajkiran Prabhakar (2013) opined that the dairy industry may be a highly profitable livestock sector, but it has to address the challenges and exploit the available opportunities through implementation of an integrated supply chains rather than fragmentation of dairy activities.

Poonia et al., (2013) reviewed the situation of dairying in Varanasi with the objectives to comprehend the nature and status of dairy industry of Eastern Varanasi and to study the issues pertaining to the dairy industry of Varanasi. The results obtained are production issues, investment and compensation and inadequate government policies and social awareness.

Rao Madhusudhana (2013) stated that Dairy Co-operatives have a major role in the white revolution in India. Dairy co-operatives are expected to develop backward, forward and horizontal integration and increase the income of the milk producers through rationalization of cost and through undertaking value addition function. Post APMACS Act1995, nine districts in Andhra Pradesh opted for APMACS, leading to loss of additional income of the farmers of Andhra Pradesh about Rs.1200 crores in the last ten years.

Mani and Intodia (2014) observed that for the calendar year 2015 fluid milk was projected to increase to 147 million tons assuming a normal monsoon and continued public and private sector efforts to improve farm management and production through extension services. Calendar year 2015 fluid milk

179

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 consumption is forecast to increase to 59.75 million tons on population growth and rising incomes, which is likely to increase pressure on dairy sector to expand. Shaphiya and Sanjeev (2014) studied dairy farming in Andhra Pradesh by taking the case of Prakasam district, which has 18 milk processing units. The dairy income represents a considerable share even for poor households of the large livestock and landholding categories.

RESEARCH GAP The investigator has visited many universities, institutions and associations as a part of data collection but many libraries have the research works on financial performance by considering one dairy unit or by restricted measurement of financial performance through very selective dynamics rather than consideration of financial performance of the industry in a specific geographical area. In this the researcher has become immensely interested to know the performance of dairy industry in an extensive and comprehensive way through his doctoral research work. However in his present research work he has been identifying, analysing and evaluating the performance of selected dairy, Vadlamudi, Guntur.

NEED FOR THE STUDY In the competitive business environment, it is difficult to sustain the business without any advanced planning or forecasting. Financial analysis can be applied in a wide variety of situations to give business managers the information they need to make critical decisions. The financial analysis helps the management to know about the current position of the business as up to date, accurate and systematic information relating to the business. It enables the management to identify the current position, progress of the business and the business prospects which leads the management to take necessary remedies and plans to develop the business.

STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM The Indian economy is also known as agrarian economy. The chief occupation of the Indian citizens from the olden days has been agriculture, dairying and mining. In addition to that Indian economy has been strengthening through the rural areas. Nearly 68% of the Indian population depends on livestock industry, in which 47.2% contributes from the dairy sector. By keeping the importance of the dairy sector, Government of India has constituted national dairy development board (NDDB) to look after all the activities related to dairying in India. However national dairy development board has created state- wise milk federations as the nodal centres to take care of dairy activity in

180

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 respective states. The milk federations have further encouraged the inspection of cooperative milk unions at district wise.

The present research study highlights the selected dairy, Vadlamudi, Guntur which is the milk reservoir of Guntur District. The researcher has attempted to study how purposefully “district milk producers unions “are utilizing their resources for enhancing the profitability position. The present research study has made a modest attempt in measuring the financial health of the selected cooperative dairy units by applying accounting tools and techniques to the data of selected dairy, Vadlamudi, Guntur. The dairy cooperatives in India have been catering the needs of the society and economy by overcoming many bottlenecks from incorporation of dairy unit to effective functioning. The dairy cooperative movement is bringing many of the advantages like eradication of poverty, creating self-employment opportunities and providing the best marketing facilities.

NATURE AND SCOPE OF THE STUDY The cooperative district milk producer plays a significant role in the economic development of rural population of the country. So they are expected to perform efficiently both financially and physically. In Andhra Pradesh the original pattern of three tier co-operative dairying was based on “bottom to top approach”. Any inefficiency on its part will weaken the co-operative dairying in the state and adversely affect the efforts towards the emancipation of living conditions of rural masses. However, the performance of dairy units is cause for worry as they have failed to produce the desired result.

During this age of competition, private dairies are entering into level playing field. The production of milk is being increased day by day but the demands do not increase in that proportion of milk and its products. In these circumstances, it is necessary to keep the dairy industry alive. The competition has already begun during the global era. To save the dairy industry, it is extremely necessary to make proper financial planning. The private dairies with limited staff, limited expenditure and modern technology are providing its products at low price and high quality to the customers. Under these circumstances, it is inevitable to have lower production cost, quality improvement, better marketing and control over expenditure to survive co- operative units operating under co-operative structure. The present study has been conducted to assess the functioning and financial appraisal of co-operative dairy industry of Andhra Pradesh state. Against this background, the present study assumes a special significance.

181

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY 1. To analyze the Growth and Development of SANGAM Dairy industry in Vadlamudi, Guntur. 2. To assess the past performance, current position and progress of the selected SANGAM Cooperative Dairy during the period of study. 3. To examine the short term solvency and long term solvency of the selected SANGAM Cooperative Dairy. 4. To find out the efficiency of asset utilization in selected SANGAM Cooperative Dairy. 5. To investigate the Profitability and overall financial performance of selected SANGAM Cooperative Dairy and to predict the Growth prospects and Tendencies of bankruptcy if any. 6. To evaluate the relative financial performance of the selected SANGAM dairy during the period of study. 7. To make Recommendations to improve the financial performance of selected SANGAM Cooperative Dairies if required.

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY Research methodology is explained under the heads source of data, period of study, sample selection, techniques of financial analysis and statistical tools used. On the basis of availability of published financial statements with selected dairy unit, complete availability of financial information during the period of study, availability of heads of income facilitating comparison, willingness of the dairy management to give the data and convenience of the research scholar selected dairy SANGAM, Vadlamudi, Guntur, for the study.

SAMPLE SELECTION Andhra Pradesh was formed on 1st November, 1956 under the States' reorganisation scheme. The State has the longest coastline (972 km) among all the States in India. Andhra Pradesh is endowed with a variety of physiographic features ranging from high hills, undulating plains to a coastal deltaic environment. Telugu, the official language of Andhra Pradesh, is described by C.P. Brown as the "Italian of the East ". The state is situated between 12041' N Latitude and 770 and 84041' E Longitude. The state is bordered by Maharashtra, Chattisgarh and Orissa to the North, the Bay of Bengal to the East, Tamilnadu to the South and Karnataka to the West. Andhra Pradesh State can be geographically divided into two regions, namely Coastal Andhra and Rayalaseema. The districts of Srikakulam, Vizianagaram, Visakhapatnam, East Godavari, West Godavari, Krishna, Guntur and Sri Potti Sreeramulu Nellore Districts come under Coastal Andhra Region; Chittoor, Kadapa, Kurnool and Anantapur Districts come under Rayalaseema Region.

182

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

On the basis of availability of published financial statements with dairy units, complete availability of financial information during the period of study, willingness of the dairy management to give the data and convenience of the research scholar about the selected SANGAM Dairy, Vadlamudi, Guntur.

SOURCE OF DATA COLLECTION The main source of data used for the study is secondary, derived from the annual reports of selected SANGAM Dairy, Vadlamudi, Guntur, information available in Trading account, Profit and loss account and balance sheets in respect periods.

PERIOD OF THE STUDY The study is made for a period of ten years from 2007-08 to 2016-17.

S.No Financial year from which data is taken 1 2007-2008 2 2008-2009 3 2009-2010 4 2010-2011 5 2011-2012 6 2012-2013 7 2013-2014 8 2014-2015 9 2015-2016 10 2016-2017

SIGNIFICANCE OF THE STUDY A study on financial performance is useful to highlight the present and future earning capacity and profitability of the organization. The benefits of study also include determining the solvency of the organization, in preparation of budgets and in assessing the long term liquidity position of the organization. This study is useful in understanding the problems and prospects of selected cooperative dairy industry in Guntur, Andhra Pradesh . This study is useful in understanding the ways of applying the tools and techniques of financial analysis to the dairy industry. The suggestions of the study will be useful to the development of dairy industry in Andhra Pradesh.

183

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

FINDINGS . The current ratio has decreased during years 2009-10, from 2012-13 to 2016- 17 years of the study and has shown increasing trend for reset of the years, six years with the lowest value of 1.54 during the 2013-14 year of the study. . The debt-equity ratio majority of ratios are below 1.00 ratio (or) 1:1 which are 0.37, 0.39, 0.45, 0.51 and 0.57 in respect years, it means that creditors and stockholders equally contribute to the assets of the business. But a few ratios are more than 1.00. So that the portion of assets provided by the creditors is greater than shareholders during the study period. . Gross margin ratio is a profitability ratio the table contains highest ratios are 16.85%, 15.19%, 14.84%, 14.76%, and 13.75% in the respect years, makes sense that higher ratios are more favourable during the present study. . Stock (or) Inventory Turnover Ratios in the year 2007-08, the ratio is 5.71 and 1.42 in the year 2008-09 is very low performance to compare with during the study period.

SUGGESTIONS:  The current ratio observed that the financial performance of Sangam Dairy has shown gradually come-down from 2012-13 to 2016-17 compare with study period of Current ratio. Current Ratio of 1 or more means that current assets are more than current liabilities and the company should not face any liquidity problem. A current ratio below 1 means that current liabilities are more than current assets, which may indicate liquidity problems. In general, higher current ratio is better. But the management of Sangam Dairy should continue the more efforts in improving the financial position i.e., Current assets than current liabilities in the study period.  It is observed that the financial performance of SANGAM Dairy has shown Debt equity ratios 1:1. Majority of ratios are below 1.00 from 2012-13 to 2016-17 during entire period of study, it means that creditors and stockholders equally contribute to the assets of the business. But a few ratios are more than 1.00. the portion of assets provided by creditors is greater than the portion of assets provided by stockholders.  The Gross margin ratio is a profitability ratio that measures how profitable a company can sell its inventory. According to that, during the study period contains highest ratios are 16.85%, 15.19%, 14.84%, 14.76%, and 13.75% in the respect years, makes sense that higher ratios are more favourable. Higher ratios mean the company is selling their inventory at a higher profit percentage. The remaining ratios are 12.16%, 12.05%, 11.42% and 10.42% in respect years. A company with a high gross margin ratios mean that the company will have more money to pay operating expenses like salaries,

184

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

utilities, and rent. Since this ratio measures the profits from selling inventory, it also measures the percentage of sales that can be used to help fund other parts of the business.  Inventory turnover ratio indicates how many times inventory is sold and replaced in a financial year of Sangam dairy during the study period. According to that, the ratios are 13.08 and 12.49 in the years 2016-17 and 2015-16 are sold very fast and the maintaining of average inventory is also comfortable. The majority of ratios are above 8.00 and below 10.00 are sold constantly in the years from 2009-10 to 2014-15. Very few ratios in the year 2007-08, the ratio is 5.71 and 1.42 ratio in the year 2008-09 is very low performance. During the study period all ratios are considered good as it suggests better inventory management.

CONCLUSIONS Based on the above findings and discussion, what conclusions can be made? Studies on financial performance of the Sangam dairy industry through different ratios which are  Liquidity ratio measure the firm’s ability to meet current obligations. It cover with current ratio; acid test ratio; cash ratio .The average cash ratio is 0.60 and improve the company has the ability to cover all short-term debt and still have cash remaining. In net working capital ratio, however the average net working capital ratio was 0.54. So the net working capital is not a satisfactory measure of the liquidity of a firm and the better indicator of the current ratio.  Leverage ratios show the proportions of debt and equity in financing the firm’s assets. It contains Debt-Equity Ratio; debt ratio; interest coverage ratio (or) debt service ratio and proprietary (or) Equity ratio.  Activity ratios reflect the firm’s efficiency in utilizing its assets. It covers the Stock (or) inventory turnover ratio; Working Capital Turnover Ratio; Fixed assets turnover ratio; total assets (or) assets turnover ratio.  Profitability ratios measure overall performance and effectiveness of the firm. It has Gross Profit ratio; Net Profit ratio; operating margin (or) operating ratio; ROA (or) ROI ratio; ROE ratio and ROCE ratio.

SUGGESTIONS FOR FUTURE RESEARCH Studies on financial performance of Sangam Dairy through ratio analysis. As such, there is a need for understanding comprehensive and systematic research to document the practices and innovative new approaches. So for studies on financial performance of cooperative dairy sector and private sector units in Andhra Pradesh as well as in other states.

185

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

References

1. Hung Anh Nguyen, Tran Huu Cuong and Bui Thi Nga. 2013. Production and Marketing constraints of dairy farmers in sonla milk value chain, Vietnam. Greener Journal of Business and Management Business Studies. 3(1): 031-037.

2. Rajiv Kumar & Dr.Rajkiran Prabhakar ‘International Journal of Logistics & Supply chain Management Perspectives, Volume no 2, Number 4. October- December 2013.

3. Poonia Amrita, Abhilash Payasi and Dharmendra Kumar. 2013. Management issues and prospects of dairy industry in Varanasi district of Uttar Pradesh, India. Indian Journal of Agriculture. 33(3): 159-165.

4. Rao Madhusudhana. 2013. Contribution of cooperative sector in development of dairy industry in Andhra Pradesh. Asian Journal of Dairy and Food Research. 32(3): 180-185.

5. Mani Radha and Intodia Vijay. 2014. India dairy and products annual 2014. Global Agriculture and Information Network. IN4089.

6. Shaphiya S.K. and Rao Sanjeev. 2014. Dairy farming in Andhra Pradesh- a case study in Prakasham district. Agriculture Economics Research Review. 27(1): 171-172.

186

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

A STUDY OF DEVADASI SYSTEM

Raji.M PhD Scholar Department of History PSGR Krishnammal College for Women Peelamedu, Coimbatore Guide: Dr. P. Vennila

Abstract

Devadasis means “Servants of God”. These women were brought up by the temple, never married and their life’s sole purpose was to dance in honour of the temple’s presiding deity. Dance became the exclusive profession of women dedicated to the temples who were called Devaradiyars or Devadasis. The main occupation of the Devadasis was music, dancing and plays acting. The word Devadasi is derived from two words “deva” meaning God and “dasi” meaning slave or servant women. The dance of Devadasis is considered as an inseparable part of the worship at various Hindu temples. Once the Devadasi system emerged it was patronized by all sections of society particularly the religious minded worshippers and art lovers. In the name of performing arts of dance and music the system also attracted many devotees, pilgrims and visitors and also enjoyed the patronage of priests and kings. As the Devadasis were supposed to be the spouses of god, they would never become widows. Devadasi from servant of god the term came to be applied to women who danced in temples sometimes also serving as courtesans. According to legend their origin lies in the apsaras, the heavenly nymphs who were the celestial dancers of Indra’s court. We learn that there were nearly 400 Devadasis in the service of the temple of Brihadiswara at Tanjore built by Raja Raja Chola I. The role of the Devadasis in the history and preservation of the dance cannot be overstated.

Keywords: Devadasis, Devaradiyars, Brihadiswara, apsaras, Tanjore, Raja Raja Chola I.

Introduction

The performance of dance as a holy offering is enjoyed in the Agama Sastras of South India containing rules for making temple images and all that pertains to temple rites and festivals. This hieratic dance was rendered exclusively by women called Devar-adiyal or Devadasis, ‘votaries of God’. Unique and unusual among Indian women commonly known as Devadasis have

187

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 long been objects of fascination as also the focus of controversy. The term Devadasi literally means female slaves of the deity. The Devadasis have had very important place in the history of mankind and Devadasi system was a popular institution in the history of early India. In the ancient times the Devadasis were divided into seven categories. They are known as Dutta, Hruta, Bhrutya, Alankara and Gopika or Rudraganika. These classes of the Devadasis were receiving fixed remunerations and some landed property for their personal use. The Devadasi tradition was prevalent in Karnataka, Maharashtra, Madras, Kerala, Goa and Andra Pradesh. In the inscriptions of southern India some kings, queens and royal families donated lands for the perpetuation of this tradition in a particular temple. Every Devadasi therefore is a slave of god. In south India a Devadasi is a girl dedicated to worship and service a deity or temple for the rest of her life. Dedicated to temples in early childhood they were married to the deity of the temple by the symbolic tying of the marriage necklace (tali) by the temple priest and the imprint of a flower pattern in sandalwood paste on each shoulder. As child novices Devadasis were taught the arts of music and dance sacred and classical literature in Sanskrit, Tamil and Telugu and certain religious duties in the temple. Devadasis danced in temples all over India. The tradition of Devadasi in the temples in the North died out due to the influences of a new religious culture and lack of patronage but continued in the South and in the East. In general Devadasis were honoured and respected.

DEVADASI SYSTEM

Women dedicated to the lord, were also to do many pleasant duties like keeping the temple premises clean, beautifying with decoration, making garlands for Lord and singing and dancing for Lord’s joy. They were known as Devadasis the servants of the Lord.1 Devadasis lives were dedicated to the services of God. They performed during important religious rites and during festivals and were permanent fixtures of the temple spending their lives within its walls.2 Devadasis means “Servants of God”. These women were brought up by the temple, never married and their life’s sole purpose was to dance in honour of the temple’s presiding deity. Sculptures of these graceful dancers in their arabesque poses can be seen chiselled in the ancient temple walls and gateways in the famous temple complexes Tanjore and Chidambaram.3 Most Chola inscriptions and Chola

1 Prof C.K Moosad, “Mohiniyattam A Classical Dance of Kerala”, Dept of Public Relations Govt of Kerala, Trivandrum, 1986, p. 11 2 Nirupama Chaturvedi, “Encyclopedia of Indian Dances”, Anmol Publications Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2007, p. 16 3 Ibid. p. 17 188

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 temples refer complimentarily to Devadasis: that some are even mentioned by name speaks of the high esteem in which they were regarded in the period. Chola king Raja refers to 400 Devadasis who were attached to the gigantic temple of Brihadeeswara temple in Tanjore. They received free quarters in four streets close to the temple and were allowed tax free land out of the temple endowment.4 Their social status was very high for they attended upon the god himself; they looked after his sanctum and danced before him.5

When the great temples were first built in India dancing girls were attached to them as a matter of course. These not only performed services for the idol but also provided an additional source of income for the shrine. The 9th and 10th centuries saw the most glorious period of temple architecture and it was at this time that the temples in South India still famous today were built. The richness of the decoration of these temples was fittingly complemented by the enchanting forms and matchless dancing of the Devadasis literally servants of god.6 The Devadasis although connected with the temples were not Brahmins. Their way of life was based matrilineal law. Property passed from mother to daughter although sons were not exempt. In practice the daughters of Devadasis after the requisite training also became temple dancers. If for some reason such as a physical defect a girl could not take to her mother’s profession, she was married off to someone in her own caste. The sons either became Nattuvanars and dance masters or married outside their caste and left the community. There were occasional cases of the sons and daughters of the richest of the Devadasis marrying into good Brahmin families.7

No Devadasis however were allowed to have any dealings with the untouchables. If they did they were tried by their own Panchayat or caste court and if found guilty were excommunicated.8

The first dance performance of a Devadasi took place in the temple in the presence of the king who conferred the title of Talaikole on the accomplished Devadasi.9 Devadasis had their own customs and traditions of social and family

4 T.J.S George, India 1000 to 2000, Express publications, Chennai, 1999, p. 385 5 Reginald Massey, “India’s Dances Their History, Technique &Repertoire”, Abhinav Publications, New Delhi, 2004, p 68 6 Ibid. p 68 7 Ibid. p 73 8 Ibid. p 73 9 Ragini Devi, “Dance Dialects of India”, Motilal Banarsidas Publishers Private Limited, Delhi, 1972 p. 45 189

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 life. They were given lands and emoluments by the king and had certain rights in law under protection.10

Devadasi from servant of god the term came to be applied to women who danced in temples sometimes also serving as courtesans.11 Devadasis the word means servants of god and has almost from prehistory been used to denote girls dedicated to serve the god in a particular temple by activities ranging from ‘housekeeping’ to ‘dancing’. Latterly the term has been used to refer exclusively to those occupied with music and dancing. Their numbers and activities are included in the records of various southern dynasties, the earliest specific evidence dating from the 7th century. Temple carvings done under the Pallavas who ruled Tamil Nadu in the 4th to 9th centuries show dancers in formal poses. The temple rules in the Agamas indicate Devadasis from the 7th century A.D. The Cholas ensured that temples were well staffed, which included dancing girls and musicians. Some temples had hundreds of dancing girls. Devadasi or a temple dancer was originally an honourable profession.12 Originally the Devadasis danced every morning and evening in the inner sanctum in front of the god, and their movements were largely back and forth determined to some extent by the space available and the location of the idol.13

Dance became the exclusive profession of women dedicated to the temples who were called Devaradiyars or Devadasis. They were not allowed to marry and performed at the temple as part of the rituals. We learn that there were nearly 400 Devadasis in the service of the temple of Brihadiswara at Tanjore built by Raja Raja Chola I. There were also rajadasis and alankara dasis who were patronised by kings and chieftains. The Nattuvanars were males who trained the Devadasis and conducted the recitals, but were never performers themselves.14

Almost all major temples of India had troupes of dancers, who are qualified as ‘Devadasis’. They were the dedicated girls who had to dance before the deity. In later times, the Devadasi system became degenerated and the Devadasis got degraded in the society. But the Devadasi dance gave birth to various dance forms in every state, according to the local conditions.

10 Ibid. p 47 11 Surjit Mansingh, “Historical Dictionary of India”, Vision Books, New Delhi, 1998, p. xv 12 H. Ronken Lynton, “Born to Dance”, Orient Longman limited, Hyderabad, 1995, p. 13 13 Ibid p. 14 14 Dr. Prema Kasturi, Dr. G. Sundaram, “South India Heritage An Introduction”, 2nd Edition, East West Books by Westland Limited, 2011, p. 453-454 190

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Bharatanatyam, Kuchipudi, Odissi and many other major dance styles have their roots in the Devadasi dance of the concerned locality.15 With the decline of the southern kingdoms and the final advent of British rule in India royal patronage of the arts ceased and dance and music in temples was curtailed. The British ruling class who did not understand the art of the Devadasis nor the customs and social environment of these gifted dancers began to condemn the dance and publicly criticized Devadasis as immoral. The traditional dance of the Devadasis found a secure place in the art life of Madras under the new name of Bhartanatyam.16

The 7th or 8th century A.D. temples strongly built of stone and wood began to appear all over Kerala. Scholars say that gradually differences arose in the rituals and modes of worship in these temples. It was during this period that the Devadasi system originated in different parts of Kerala. The Devadasi tradition of dancing arose out of Sringarabhakti movement. In some of the Upanishad’s the yearning of the Jeevatma (individual soul) to be united with the Paramatma (universal soul) is compared to the yearning of a maiden, in deep love to be united to her lover. In this concept of Bhakti and love there is only one Purusha (man) in this world; all the other creatures are women (female in nature). All the Jeevatma-s are women, yearning to be united with the one Purusha the Paramatma. This hero-heroine aspect is the essence of Devadasi dance. Thus the Devadasi tradition of dance is an artistic visual representation of the eager yearning of the Jeevatma to merge into the Paramatma which is represented by the deity of the temple. In this doctrine the Devadasi is supposed to be the consort of the deity of the temple (deva- vadhu). So when a maiden is received by a temple as a Devadasi a token wedding is performed to the deity of that temple so that she becomes a deva-vadhu. This ceremony used to be performed in temples at the time of taking a maiden as Devadasi. In some of the temples of Kerala this ceremony was called Pen-kettu. When a maiden thus becomes a Devadasi the temple would give her Kudi (house to live in) and Padi (food or means of livelihood). In the famous temples of Suchindram there were about 32 such Devadasi Kudi-s. The chief duties of Devadasis were singing and dancing but they were often employed to do some other duties also in certain temples.17

15 Ibid p. 9-10 16 Ragini Devi, “Dance Dialects of India”, Motilal Banarsidas Publishers Private Limited, Delhi, 1972 p 49 17 Nirmala Paniker, “Nangiar Koothu, The Classical Dance-Theatre of the Nangiar-s”, Natana Kairali, Thrissur, Kerala, 1992, p. 9-10 191

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

The Devadasis were named Kutikkaris and Manikkattar and Karikaiyar. The first record which refers to the system is of AD 1257 in the Cholapuram inscription. The Kutikkari system was abolished in 1921 by the Regent Rani of Travancore. A detailed account of the Kutikkari (Devadasi) system of Suchindram temple is given by Dr. K.K Pillai in his renowned treatise ‘Suchindrum Temple’ published in 1953. Describing all historical aspects of the Devadasi system which existed in the Suchindram temple, the author says that during festival seasons the Dasis were sent to Sri Padmanabhaswami temple at Trivandrum to dance in the temple before the deity. N Subramania Iyer in his Census Report of 1901 states that the Devadasis were adopted from the Tamil group term ‘Padamangalam’ who belonged to the Nair community.

As per the record of AD 867 there were 37 active dancers and many retired persons. There were Tamil Devadasis and Nair Devadasis and they were identified by their costumes, dress etc. attached to the Kanyakumari temple also there were Devadasis. V. Nagamaya, author of the Travancore State Manual (volume II page 383) refers to the Devadasis who were brought to the Sri Padmanabhaswami temple, Trivandrum. Thus we get much information about Devadasiyattam and the Devadasi system attached to the temples of Kerala, which existed from 1257 to 1921 AD.18

As the Devadasis were supposed to be the spouses of god, they would never become widows. To see a Devadasi when one set off on a journey or business was considered to be auspicious. When a king set out for some important purpose, Devadasis were purposely posted at his door so that he might have their auspicious sight at the time of coming out. When the Maharaja of Travancore went on a tour, the Devadasis of each village had to receive him as he enters the village and escort or accompany him in his “progress” through that village. In the famous Athachamayam festival at Tripunithara the Devadasis had a special place in the procession. This custom was in vogue till very recent times. During the period of the British rule the government prohibited by law the institution of Devadasis. But till then there were Devadasis in many Kerala temples. All the evidence found so far about the temple danseuses of Kerala is from the 10th century A.D. or later. During that period danseuses were known by various names like Nanga, Nangachi, Nangayar, Nangiyar, Talivadhu, Koothathi, Koothacchi and Tevidichi.19

18 V.S Sharma, “Dance and Music of South India”, International School of Dravidian Linguistics, Thiruvananthapuram, 2007, p 29 19 Nirmala Paniker, “Nangiar Koothu, The Classical Dance-Theatre of the Nangiar-s”, Natana Kairali, Thrissur, Kerala, 1992, p. 11-12 192

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

A stone inscription of the year 932 A.D. found in the Chokkur Siva temple near Calicut contains references to the danseuses of Kerala of that age. The inscription mentions how one Nangyar belonging to the Chittarayil family donated some land of the temple. Another valuable source of information about Devadasis is a record of the year 934 A.D. from the Tali Siva temple at Nedumpuram. This document mentions the payments made to Nangai-s (danseuses) and Nattuvans (teachers of dancing). In the inscription of the 12th century A.D. obtained from the Vadakkumnatha Siva temple of Thrissur it is recorded that there were Devadasis in that temple. In many of the Manipravala and a few Sanskrit works written in the second half of the 13th century and later, the heroines are good danseuses.20

Devadasi was known by the general name Tevidichi which means literally “a woman who serves at the feet of god”. (Tevidichi= teva+ adi+ achi. Teva=god, adi=feet, achi= woman). Their dance came to be called Tevidichiyattam or Tevidichi Koothu. In the Tiruvalla inscription (in Sasana No.1) means that for four Tevidichis twelve idangazhis (a measure of quantity) of rice should be given during Avani Onam festival.21 At Thripunithara till about 55 years ago the Devadasi dance performed in the temple at dusk was called Tevidichiyattam or Thevidissi Koothu. Tevidissiyattam later, acquired another name Mohiniyattam.22

In Kerala, the worship in the sanctum sanctorum is conducted through Mantra and Tantra. The Sopanam there was the instrumental music played and on the Mandapam in front, Devadasis conducted dances to the tune of Sopanam music.23 The Devadasis had acquired a high level of proficiency in dancing as is evidenced by sculptures and paintings in temples and references in Malayalam poems like Sivavilasam (14th century A.D). The main occupations of the Devadasis were music, dancing and play acting. But as the Devadasi system degenerated and the Devadasis became symbols of moral bankruptcy their dance form with its emphasis on the erotic side of life, was not considered very respectable at a later period of Kerala history.24 Kerala is a land where many temples from Kanyakumari to the northern and preserved the Devadasi system.

20 Ibid. p. 12 21 Ibid p. 13 22 Ibid p. 14 23 Ibid p. 13 24 A. Sreedhara Menon, “Cultural Heritage of Kerala”, D C Books, Kottayam, 1978, p. 112-113

193

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

There were many distinguished Devadasis and poetical works like ‘Chandrotsavam’, ‘Manipravala Sandesa Kavyas’, ‘Padya Ratnam’ etc. which reflect the importance of Devadasi culture prevalent during 13-15 centuries. Till 1930 the Devadasi system was active in Travancore and Regent ruler Sethu Lakshmi Bai stopped the ‘Kutikkari Puja’ (Devadasi system of worship) by regulations. Suchindram temple had Devadasis attached to it and the last Devadasi dancer lived upto the 1970. It is believed that the most popular Keralite female dance form of Mohiniyattam also had its roots in the age-old Devadasi style of dancing.25 Devadasis congregated at several places in Kerala like Tiruvanvandur, Tiruchambaram, Pallikunnu in Malabar area; Mathilakam and Kodungallur in former Cochin area and Odanad and Kandiyur in Travancore area. They assumed titles like Manomenaka and Marilekha. About their quality of their dance the only work that throws light is Damodara Chakyar’s Sivavilasam according to which the sculptured gods in the dancing hall of Kandiyoor temple seemed to be real gods who were spell- bound by the beauty of the dances performed that very night. Suka Sandesa also refers to daily practice of dance in temples. Even Marco Paulo’s travelogue of the 13th century and Barbosa’s of the 11th century confirm this.26 The disruption of Chera Empire with its headquarters at Thiruvanchikulam, no doubt, caused the spread out of Devadasis and their identification with the Nangiars at different centres. It was this historical event that helped the flowering of Mohiniyattam but the socio-economic changes that swept over the land caused general deterioration of standards and moral degradation.27 For the first time the Devadasis were induced to come out of temple precincts and present their sacred art to please the war lords. Sri M.K.K Nayar rightly compares the condition of the Devadasis with that of singing birds kept long in golden cages from their infancy thrown suddenly out into the wide world. The Devadasis in their new- found freedom fell an easy prey to the naked lust of their so called patrons. We have the Shakespearean dictum that lilies when foul smell worse than weeds and it came true of Devadasis. The result was that the term Devadasi; or thevidichy became synonymous with prostitution. The British during their occupation were forced to ban Dasiyattam in areas under their control. We know in Travancore during the Regent Maharani’s regime Dasiyattam was banned.28

25 V.S Sharma, “Dance and Music of South India”, International School of Dravidian Linguistics, Thiruvananthapuram, 2007, p 10 26 Ibid p. 37 27 Ibid p. 43 28 Ibid p 44 194

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

The Brahmeswara inscriptions of the 9th century AD, we see that the reign of Kesari Kings, Moharis were attached to all the major temples of the state. Some Manuscripts deal with hand gestures employed; some refer to poses and some maintain that Moharis could use Geeta Govinda or Ashtapadi as in Kerala.29

While the temple and the court the main pillars of art patronage emasculated during the British rule the Devadasi or temple dancer not only lost her support base but also earned social censure, the institution of the temple dancer being finally abolished by law. The Devadasi in the south and the Tawaif in the north were special categories of women empowered as entertainers living outside the conventional institution of marriage and domesticity.30

The ancient system of dance training Arangatrau Kathai is fully explained in Silappadikaram (verses 113 to 159). This great dance tradition which has existed for more than two thousand years is the treasured heritage of the Devadasis who under munificent royal patronage maintained the aesthetic perfection of their sacred at with deep religious devotion.31

Buchanan, who travelled extensively in Malabar and South Canara, has recorded that when Brahmin widows became Devadasis they associated only with Brahmins or with members of higher castes; the latter choice involving the payment of a separate and additional tax. The social life of these women was dignified. Abbe Dubois a French Jesuit and an astute observer gives a e description of the Devadasis.32

Both the South Indian Princely States and the Madras High Court recognized their rights and status. They were legally permitted to adopt daughters from outside their profession or caste. But these rights were recognized in British India only in those areas which came under the jurisdiction of the Madras High Court.33

29 Ibid p 45 30 Rupinder Khullar, “India Land of Celebration”, OM Books International, New Delhi, 2005, p. 211 31 Ragini Devi, “Dance Dialects of India”, Motilal Banarsidass Publishers Pvt Ltd, Delhi, 2000, p. 47 32 Bharati Sivaji, Vijayalakshmi, “Mohiniyattam”, Wisdom Tree, New Delhi, 2004, p. 25 33 Reginald Massey, “India’s Dances Their History, Technique &Repertoire”, Abhinav Publications, New Delhi, 2004, p 74 195

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

By the middle of the 19th century when the Devadasi system had declined and deteriorated into open prostitution, concerted efforts were made to the dedication of young girls to the temple.34 Fortunately, however, parallel to the attempts to abolish the Devadasi system, fortunately, a growing body of individuals tried to rescue the art form from the degradation to which it had descended. By the beginning of the 20th century the original purity of the dance survived in a very few places.35

One of the main reasons why the Devadasi system fell into disrepute was that young girls were sometimes abducted to swell the numbers in the temples. This led to a concerted effort on the part of the British government, the Indian states and some Indian social reformers to put an end to the system. The princely states of Mysore and Travancore both stopped the dedication of Devadasis in 1910 and 1930 respectively. But in 1927 there were still 200,000 temple prostitutes in the Madras Presidency alone, which was a part of India. Although there are no Devadasis as such in India today there are many good dancers, dance teachers and musicians who come from the Devadasi caste.36

Conclusion

A Devadasi was popularly known as devoted temple dancer. She uses to perform her dances with a view to entertaining the lords or gods but certainly not to the human beings. Devadasi tradition is a part of India’s socio-religious culture since ancient times. It is a religious practice in parts of Southern India. Devadasis had their own customs and traditions of social and family life. They were given lands and emoluments by the king and had certain hereditary rights in law under royal protection. Temple festivals were special occasions for a display of classical dancing when Devadasis were honoured with titles and gifts for their art conferred by the king. The names of famous Devadasis are to be found in temple chronicles and inscriptions. The attitude of the Devadasis was purely devotional and other art was confined only to the temple precincts. The Devadasi could never be a widow, and so she was considered lucky. Her presence therefore on auspicious occasions such as weddings and births was regarded as essential. Whenever possible she made talis for others and sometimes incorporated a bead or two from her own as a special favour. Her role was not

34 Krishna Sahai, “The Story of a Dance: Bharatanatyam, Indialog Publications Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2003, p. 40 35 Ibid p. 41 36 Reginald Massey, “India’s Dances Their History, Technique &Repertoire”, Abhinav Publications, New Delhi, 2004, p. 76-77 196

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 just that of a dancing girl as the term currently implies, but she had speclialised services which none other could perform, from cleaning the temple premises, including the sanctum sanctorum, preparing the ingredients for the adornment of the deity for the prayers etc. their jobs were specified and they were paid accordingly. The Devadasis had also a social role – they were present at every auspicious social occasion. The Devadasis over a period gained enormous respect and wealth and because of their talent and beauty, ended up being queens and other important powerful players in society.

References

1. Bharati Sivaji, Vijayalakshmi, “Mohiniyattam”, Wisdom Tree, New Delhi, 2004. 2. Dr. Prema Kasturi, Dr. Sundaram G, “South India Heritage An Introduction”, 2nd Edition, East West Books by Westland Limited, 2011. 3. George T.J.S, “India 1000 to 2000”, Express publications, Chennai, 1999. 4. Krishna Sahai, “The Story of a Dance: Bharatanatyam”, Indialog Publications Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2003. 5. Magazines.odisha.gov.in.>Jun>engpdf, Dr. Purna Chandra Mishra, June 2014. 6. Nirmala Paniker, “Nangiar Koothu, The Classical Dance-Theatre of the Nangiar-s”, Natana Kairali, Thrissur, Kerala, 1992. 7. Nirupama Chaturvedi, “Encyclopedia of Indian Dances”, Anmol Publications Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2007. 8. Prof C.K Moosad, “Mohiniyattam A Classical Dance of Kerala”, Dept of Public Relations Govt of Kerala, Trivandrum, 1986. 9. Ragini Devi, “Dance Dialects of India”, Motilal Banarsidas Publishers Private Limited, Delhi, 1972. 10. Reginald Massey, “India’s Dances Their History, Technique &Repertoire”, Abhinav Publications, New Delhi, 2004. 11. Ronken Lynton H, “Born to Dance”, Orient Longman limited, Hyderabad, 1995. 12. Rupinder Khullar, “India Land of Celebration”, OM Books International, New Delhi, 2005. 13. Sharma V.S, “Dance and Music of South India”, International School of Dravidian Linguistics, Thiruvananthapuram, 2007. 14. Sreedhara Menon A, “Cultural Heritage of Kerala”, D C Books, Kottayam, 1978. 15. Surjit Mansingh, “Historical Dictionary of India”, Vision Books, New Delhi, 1998.

197

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

ECONOMIC REFORMS AND THEIR IMPACT IN AGRICULTURE DEVELOPMENT OF INDIA Mrs.N.Sharmila Ph.D Scholar Department of History P.S.G.R Krishnammal College for Women Peelamedu, Coimbatore

INTRODUCTION:

Transformation is the vital to every walk of human life. Likewise, Economic policy initiatives in India have taken place without any proven ideology. According to Ahluwalia changes, however, were incremental. Technocrats had to push the political establishment slowly in efforts to liberalize the system.1 Alleviation of poverty and unemployment continues to be the obstacle for the objective of socio-economic development of India.

A new economic reform was introduced by the late Prime Minister P.V. Narasimha Rao. The new economic policy was basically an instrument to integrating Indian economy with rest of the world. Agriculture reforms are widely accepted on account of the modernization, liberalization and Internalization of the Nation’s economy. The absence of any deliberate effort at extending deregulation and liberalization to the agriculture sector is all the more striking when one considers the importance of agriculture in the national economy for growth, employment and social justice and the balance of payment.2 Agriculture and allied activities still account for domestic product and this sector’s contribution is still a little higher than that of the organized manufacturing sector.

Agriculture development can be widened its prospects with efficiency of political setup. Agriculture development is the whole gamut of economic activity which is essential for the social obligation. Agriculture and industry are interdependent. The agriculture sector provides the market opportunity for manufacturing industry such as consumer goods, fertilizers, pesticides, farm machinery and equipment. Export of agriculture –based commodities accounts

1 . Dr.Shailesh Choubey,Dr.N.G.Pendse,Dr.Narendra Shukla (2005).Economic Reforms in India.Published by. Sarup & Sons,New Delh-2.First Edition 2005. P.1 2 . M.Narasimham(2002).Economic Reforms: Development and Finance,UBSPD Publication, New Delhi-2.P.154. 198

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 for nearly 50 percent of our total export earnings. Therefore even a small rise in agricultural production would produce favorable results of the export front.3 Rational agriculture is being focused in the modern world. Food production programme are significantly attached to the organized institutions to increase the agriculture production. In developing country like India, the liberalization of economy and the wide vision of agriculture alone would improve the standard life for people. Accordingly economic reforms are the factors that sensibly upward the trend in agricultural economy.

ECONOMIC CHALLENGES AND REFORMS IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES:

Countries across the globe have established progressively closer social, political and economic contacts over many centuries, but recently the pace has dramatically increased. Fewer restrictions on international flows of capital, goods and services, manpower have made the world more interdependent than ever. Capital, technology and raw material are moving ever more swiftly across national borders. Along with this products and finances, ideas and cultures are circulating more freely. Developing countries usually depend of limited primary products. In India, agricultural commodities like tea, coffee, spices, cashew nuts and jute and processed items of cotton textiles, jute manufacturing and leather goods form the mainstay of the agricultural exports.

Economic policy initiatives in India have taken place without any intervention of any leading institution of Economy. Economic changes could have achieved only through the Economic reforms enacted. Past two and half decades such reforms have changed the national economic structures across the globe. Economic reforms have been a powerful instrument stimulating a significant increase global aggregate output that has been accompanied by an even larger increase in international trade. Globalization is the phenomenon that makes countries and people around the globe are more connected to each other and the flow of Information and technology more quickly than ever. The process of globalization has picked up momentum towards unprecedented developments in information technology, fast moving transportation and also mobile business operation. Globalization further improved and gaining the momentum through the off shoring of call centers. However some quarters of developed countries raise their objection of off shoring. They are particular about the development of

3 . G.Kathuria and K.Chandrasekharan(1973),Elements of Agricultural Finance,Progressive Corporation Private Ltd, Bombay,1973.P.1. 199

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 their countries interest at the cost of the developing world. Their fear is at the possible reduction in their employment opportunities over relocations of company call centers in countries like India.

But, developing countries feel that advance countries should encourage the off shoring in the equal footing of globalization of trade. The international financial institution like International Monetary Fund (IMF) and the International Bank of Reconstruction and Development (IBRD) and regional trade agreements, the World Trade Organization and the transnational companies assist the process and contribute to the efforts of the advanced countries by compelling poor countries to integrate by reducing tariffs privatizing public sector undertakings, liberalizing the regulations for the establishment of private companies and relaxing environmental, health and labour standards.4

World Trade Organization enacts the rules for international trade. Its function in civil society is important. Often it has become targeted to criticize for its obscure, democratic mismatch and neo-liberal ideology. World Bank is operating to eradicating poverty by granting loans to poor countries for development or to their constructive purpose. Moreover, the World Bank is targeted for its policies like ‘Structural adjustment programme’ on recipient countries, mostly the developing countries, forcing them to adopt reforms like deregulation of capital markets, privatization of public programs for social welfare downsizing the budget for education, health and sanitation, and the like. Privatization water supplies, fees for public schools and hospitals and privatization of public pensions are among the most controversial reforms of the Bank. Thus the Bank fights with the poor people pushing them into the deepest poverty by its initial objective of fighting against poverty and uplift the poor people.5

However, it is felt to the above concerts that the globalization must be regulated accordance with sustainable development. Instead of competitive market the developing world sees the foreign direct investment as a tool for growth amidst the increased instability and inequality. Politically the national governments have been the responsible to maintain the social security and economic welfare beyond the borders. An economic globalization and information technology paves way for global culture. Globalization has made the

4 . D.L.Narayana(2006)Issues of Globalisation and Economic Reforms,Vol-I,Serials Publications,NewDelhi’2006.p.81. 5 .Ibid.P.89 200

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

Indian worker’s language to the international English dialect or including an influx of English words and abbreviations are unavoidable. Globalization is seen by uneven growth not only within the countries, but also within the region or trade places.

Globalization of law functioned as the universal applications of regulations and rules for its legal standards. Global poverty is increasing considerably even there is enough food in the world for every person to lead healthy and productive life. It is contrast that hundreds of millions of people go to bed hungry every night while large number of others suffers from obesity. A number of developing countries like India, China, and Brazil are facing the problem of hunger.

Sustainable environment has to be established to protect the earth’s water, forest, climate, biodiversity, food and energy. Often developing countries suffer the ecological consequence for being vulnerable to the rich countries interest. It is necessary to create a battleground between forces for greater environmental protection from those who violate rules and regulations in the name of globalization, free markets and economic liberalizations and growth. Rich countries and transnational companies dominate the global market and also create unequal trade. Poor countries experience unemployment, poverty and income inequality. Agricultural subsidies and trade barriers in Europe Union and United State of America prevent poor countries from gaining access to the most important markets. Developing countries have certain competitive advantage over in low technology manufacturers such as textile, garments and chemicals. The process of globalization has made the economic factors beyond the factors of politics, environment, law and culture. It is implied that the practice of globalization has to be included the non-economic factors like politics, environment, law and culture.

Such policies of globalization should be mutually benefited for both developed and developing nations. Further it is also emphasized that the advanced countries should not exploit the developing countries in the name of liberalization and globalization. All-round developments of world nations are to be established towards global economy, culture, law and environment. India like developing countries needs to be equipped with the fast changing technologies and acquiring complex skills to overcome the global barriers.

201

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

AGRICULTURE SECTOR REFORMSAND ECONOMIC DEVELOLPMENT IN INDIA:

Agriculture plays a pivotal role in Indian economy. It provides livelihood to 70 percent of its country’s population. It also contributes around 50 per cent of the country’s national income. India is occupying second most populous country in the world. It is pertinent to be lived in the world economic freedom. A comprehensive economic programme adopted in 1936. Towards the end of 1938, a National Planning Committee was constituted, thus the idea of planning came into prominence in India. Early in 1950, the following the adoption of the new constitution by the constituent Assembly of India, the Government of India established the Planning Commission to assess the country’s material, capital and human resources and to formulate a plan for their most effective and balanced utilization. Since then, beginning from 1951, six five-year plans and annual plans (1966-69) have been completed.6

SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE REFORMS:

Important features for pattern development have been envisaged through the five year plans. It provides sound platform for sustainable economic growth so that the increasing opportunities for gainful employment and improving living standards and working conditions for the masses are established. The five year plans provide for a comprehensive and many sided effort to transform the peasants outlook and environment. Ultimately it has changed mental outlook of the peasants. Till recently, only traditional agricultural practices were in vogue. In Indian context agriculture and industry were in a primitive stage for hundreds of years. National income or real per capita income is a common yardstick used to measure the economic development of a country. The progress of scientific and technological development in the country is generally slow though the scientific and technological development both in agriculture and industry is confined to certain pockets. The overall progress would be 42.6milion hectares of land irrigated out of 166.8 million hectares of total cropped area in the country.

Fertilizer consumption is comparatively low among other developing countries. It could be increased for the requirement of the soil and a particular crop. The yield rates of paddy, wheat and maize are much lower than the rate

6 . C.Arputharaj (1982) Indian Agricultural Economy, Macmillan India Limited Publication, Madras 600 002.P.5. 202

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 obtained in pakistan and bangladesh. The high yield can be obtained only through the progress in the technological development in developing country like India.

Again, supply of raw materials and food grains are very important for economic development. In developing economy, the demand for agricultural raw materials will be increasing. Cotton, jute, sugar and oil industries depend on the availability of raw materials for their expansion. Regarding food grains, the increasing population has to be fed. Also in developing economic conditions, transfer of population from the rural to urban areas will result in large-scale movements of good grains to urban areas.7

CROPPING PATTERN:

Cropping pattern is nothing but the proportion of area under different crops at a point of time. So the Cropping pattern implies the proportion of area under different crops. Physical factors like soil, climate, and irrigation are determined factor of crops to be raised. In addition to this, economic factors such as production, availability of resources, condition of the market, land and the demand and supply are the chief components for crops to be raised. Draft, floods and adverse agro-climatic conditions in several parts of the country are expected to have an adverse effect on good grains production. The Government has taken various measures towards the crop pattern like research, legislation and administrative measures, subsidized farm inputs and provision of irrigation facilities and fertilizers.

The economic development of the country predominantly depends on the human resources. Growth of population has impact over economic progress. Agriculture labour could be classified into family labour and hired labour. The first category mostly belongs to small farms which are not financially in a position to hire labour. However they can hire labour as and when the labour is required in abundance for the work of transplanting, weeding and harvesting.

7 .Ibid.P.17. 203

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

EFFECTIVE METHODS OF IRRIGATION AND WATER MANAGEMENT:

In India Surface water and ground water are the two main sources of irrigation. Accumulation of water in rivers and lakes, tanks, ponds and artificial reservoirs provide the surface water. Different crops can be grown throughout the year. But the wise judgment of using surface water as well as ground water can be led to double and even triple cropping in the same fields. During the Second Plan period construction of tube wells were taken up. On the end of Fourth Plan the number of wells has been increased. The Indian five year plans have always stressed the importance of expanding irrigation facilities in order to ensure the supply of the vital input, water, at the correct tie and in sufficient volume, to bring about agricultural development.8

Drip irrigation is considered to be the alternative source to expand the coverage to reach out the target groups. Rs.100 crore special programmed Maru Gochar Yojana has been proposed to be taken for rehabilitation of traditional pastures in Rajasthan for restoration of traditional courses and other measures to provide effective drought proofing.

NATIONAL AGRICULTURE POLICY:

National agriculture policy is mainly dealing with the new approach towards the management of agriculture sector. By reorienting the agriculture sector, it was envisaged to analyses the objectives of approaches and strategies on planning, seeds, agriculture insurance scheme, and National agricultural technology project; study the status of Indian farmers. The first ever National policy on agriculture aims at a growth rate in excess of four per cent annum in the agriculture sector based on efficient use of resources and conservation of soil, water and biodiversity. It ensures the growth of agro business, create employment in rural areas.

Seeds are certainly the most essential input in agriculture since the whole process of agriculture production is based on them. Accordingly, the striking development in recent years has been brought out by superior seed varieties which would fetch immediate profit for the farmer. Though, the improved varieties are only superior under a given set of environmental circumstances. The

8 .Ibid.P.54. 204

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

National Seeds Corporation was set up in 1963 as an organization to produce small quantities of hybrid seed and the seeds of certain vegetables. In 1955, the corporation assumed and expanded role of producing foundation seed and initiating a programme of maintaining the quality. A Central Seeds Act was passed by the Parliament in December’1966 making statuary provision for quality control of seed. Seed inspection and certification also under taken.9 The National seeds policy, envisages timely availability of quality seeds, compulsory registration of seeds, quality assurance, promotion of seed industry, abolition of licenses for seed dealers, import of best quality of seeds and creation of Seed Banks and National seed Grid.

MARKETING AND AGRICULTURE TRADE REFORMS:

Trade dealing with other countries is called foreign trade which comprises imports into the country and exports from that country. Foreign trade is very important for interdependent economies. Export of agricultural commodities increased from year after year. Import substitution through domestication production has been an important policy measure under five year plan.

In the first two five year plans the estimates of exports were more in the nature of expected earnings rather than achievements and targets set for the plan. During the third plan export targets were fixed on the basis of special studies undertaken of selected commodities. On fourth plan the compound rate of growth was established. The fifth plan mentioned that the important agriculture commodities which possess the potential and possibilities are fish and fish preparations, leather and leather manufactures, cotton textiles, raw cotton, essential oils and sugar. Accordingly the following five year plans are systematically enhanced the economical development even in the marginal possibility for traditional items of tea, coffee, jute manufactures, tobacco, cashew kernels and also like oilcakes.

There are 28 Agriculture Export Zones (AEZ) are being set up in 14 States with an investment of Rs.781 crores. Transport assistance is being provided for the first time for the export of various agricultural items including processed foods, vegetables. Floriculture, wheat and rice products, daily produces. India is

9 .Ibid.P.61. 205

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 actively participating in the ongoing review of World Trade Organization (WTO) agreement on agriculture.10

REFORMS IN COOPERATIVE SECTOR:

Cooperative movements came into force in the nineteenth century. After that various laws were enacted to regulate and control rural credit. The Agricultural Loan Act provided only short term loan. But, the passing of the Cooperative Societies Act in 1904 have shown the dawn of the movement in India. After the Second World War the agricultural commodities went up and the agriculturists were enjoyed a period of boon. To be increased in agriculture production the Reserve Bank of India appointed a committee to conduct an all India survey to initiate changes to the flow of agricultural finance. The five year plan fixed the target to bring to the fold of cooperation 50 per cent of thee villages and 30 per cent of the rural population in the period of 10 years. The second five year plan paved way for raising agriculture societies and there by undertaking of marketing surplus agricultural produces. Second five year plan marked the targets for a number of primary societies, marketing and processing society’s cooperative warehouses. The third five year plan carried forward the export of agricultural commodities to foreign countries. The fourth and fifth five year plans increased the efficiency of the cooperatives and consumer cooperatives, the structural improvement of weak central banks and non-viable primary agricultural credit societies respectively. Further all other five year plans are the system that ensures the agricultural marketing and makes the amicability in agricultural production flow significantly. The objective of National Policy in cooperatives, which was announced in March 2002, it facilitates all-round development of cooperatives in the country. Under this policy, cooperatives would be provided necessary support, encouragement and assistance to enable them to work as autonomous, self-reliant and democratically managed institutions, which will be accountable to their members.11

CONCLUSION:

Economic reforms are signifying the necessary rational approaches to fortify the unique strengths of the nation and thereby imply a specific appeal to finding meaningful way in agriculture sector. Being developing country India is inspire

10 . Dr.Shailesh Choubey , Dr.N.G.Pendse, Dr.Narendra Shukla (2005).Economic Reforms in India. Published by.Sarup & Sons, New Delh-2.First Edition 2005. P.94. 11 .Ibid.P.93. 206

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 to targeting prosperity and good life for every citizen or simply means ‘Alleviate poverty’. Eradicating illiteracy by the way of education and training of our citizen could be ease out the target and of being success of the nation’s aspiration to developed country. India has to follow a unified development policy taking into account of its strength and weaknesses. Information technology and the brain power of India have to become our strength and identity on the line of ideology of Kautilya and Aryabatta. Our country must be advanced with the aid of prudence in policy and planning besides to take full advantage of service sector to emerging out a developed country.

Books Reference:

1. Dr.ShaileshChoubey, Dr.N.G.Pendse, Dr.NarendraShukla(2005).Economic Reforms in India.Publishedby.Sarup & Sons,New Delh-2.First Edition 2005. 2. M.Narasimham(2002).Economic Reforms: Development and Finance,UBSPD Publication, New Delhi-2. 3. G.Kathuria and K.Chandrasekharan(1973),Elements of Agricultural Finance,Progressive Corporation Private Ltd, Bombay,1973. 4. D.L...Narayana(2006)Issues of Globalisation and Economic Reforms,Vol- I,Serials Publications,New Delhi’2006. 5. C.Arputharaj(1982) Indian Agricultural Economy,Macmillan India Limited Publication,Madras 600 002. 6. Shastri Ahluwalia (1988) Nehru 100 Years, Manas Publication Delhi-07,First Edition (1998). 7. B. Satyanaryan (2001) Growth, Industrialisation and New Economic Reforms In India,Concept Publishing Company, New Delhi-59.First Edition 2001. NEWSPAPERS AND JOURNALS:

8. Yojana, Fortnightly Journal, New Delhi, 2003-2004. 9. Kurushetra, Ministry of Rural Development Monthly Journal. Vol.61, New Delhi, 2013. 10. Hartmut Elsehans,”Political Economy or Economic Politics? Prospects of Civil Society 1. In the Era of Globalization,” Inidan Journal of Public Administration (New Delhi), vol XLVI. No.4. Oct-Dec 2000. 11. G-7, 18th Meeting, “Trade Pact by Year –End”, Economic Times (New Delhi), 9 July 1992.

207

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

KANHAILAL’S PEBET AS A RESISTANCE PLAY Swathy H Assistant Professor Bhavan’s College of Arts and Commerce Kakkanad, Kerala

208

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

209

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

210

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

211

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

212

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

213

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

214

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

215

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

216

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OFMULTIDISCIPLINARYEDUCATIONALRESEARCH ISSN: 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

POVERTY ALLEVIATION: A STUDY OF INDIAN GOVERNMENT ROLE AND SUCCESS Dr. Ravikumar S. Naik Assistant Professor in Economics D. R. K. College of Commerce Kolhapur, Affiliated to Shivaji University Kolhapur Maharashtra

Abstract:

Development of nation’s economy is measured in the terms of GDP. The GDP of developing and underdeveloped nations is affected by various obstacles such as high population, lack of infrastructure, poverty, unemployment, lack of quality education and lack of advanced know-how. Indian Economy also faces the problem of vicious circle of poverty. Government of India has focused on eradication of poverty and to develop the standard of living of the people. Sustainable Development Goals includes the poverty reduction goal till 2030. To achieve the goal of poverty reduction government has launched several schemes and implemented the same. This research focuses on the study of remedial measures implemented by the government of India for poverty alleviation and its output.

Key words: Eradication, Poverty, Economic development, Programme and Sustainable development

Introduction: Poverty reduction is one of the objectives of sustainable development goals which is to be achieved till 2030. Every nation contributes to achieve sustainable development goal. United Nations (2009) has declared human right for quality of life on earth everyone has the right to a standard of living adequate for health and well-being, including food, clothing, housing and medical care and necessary social services (George Kent, 2004). The global intense poverty rate cut down to 9.2 percent in 2017, from 10.1 percent in 2015. That is equivalent to 689 million people living on less than $1.90 a day. At higher poverty lines, 24.1 percent of the world lived on less than $3.20 a day and 43.6 percent on less than $5.50 a day in 2017. In economy development process high poverty rate is one of the obstacles. Developing nations with more population face the problem of poverty. India’s total population as per census 2011 was 121crores. According to the

217

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OFMULTIDISCIPLINARYEDUCATIONALRESEARCH ISSN: 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

World Bank, India with 17.5% of the world's population had 20.6% of the world's poorest in 2011. Indian economy development faces the challenges of heavy population, poverty, unemployment, low productivity etc., basically high population is key cause of all obstacles in development of an economy. During 2004-05 the poverty rate in India was 37.20 percent which reduced to 29.80 and 21.90 percent in 2009-10 and 2011-12 respectively. (Source: Handbook Of Statistics On Indian States RBI 2016-17). Present research paper analysed the role of government in eradication of poverty and success in India.

Objectives: 1. To study the government role in poverty eradication 2. To study the poverty trend among Indian rural and urban areas.

Methodology: Secondary data is used for the present research study. Data and information related to present research paper is taken from various governments published data, internet, news paper, books etc.

Poverty: The World Bank Organization describes poverty in this way: “Poverty is hunger. Poverty is lack of shelter. Poverty is being sick and not being able to see a doctor. Poverty is not having access to school and not knowing how to read. Poverty is not having a job, is fear for the future, living one day at a time. Poverty has many faces, changing from place to place and across time, and has been described in many ways. Most often, poverty is a situation people want to escape. So poverty is a call to action -- for the poor and the wealthy alike -- a call to change the world so that many more may have enough to eat, adequate shelter, access to education and health, protection from violence, and a voice in what happens in their communities.” (Source:https://www2.gnb.ca/content/gnb/en/departments/esic/overview/content/ what_is_poverty.html)

Types of poverty:

1. Situational poverty The type of poverty caused by a sudden crisis or loss and is often temporary. Environmental disasters, divorce, or severe health problems are the examples of Situational poverty.

218

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OFMULTIDISCIPLINARYEDUCATIONALRESEARCH ISSN: 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

2. Generational poverty occurs in families where at least two generations have been born into poverty. 3. Absolute poverty, involves a scarcity of basic necessities such as shelter, running water, and food. Families who live in absolute poverty tend to focus on day-to-day survival. This type of poverty is rarely seen in developed countries like USA. 4. Relative poverty refers to the economic status of a family whose income is insufficient to meet its society's average standard of living. 5. Urban poverty is seen in metropolitan areas with. The urban poor are dependent on often-inadequate large-city services. 6. Rural poverty is found in nonmetropolitan areas. Rural areas face the challenges of poor infrastructure, lack of quality education and lack of job opportunities.

Table No. 1

Number of Poor Estimated (Poverty Estimates) by Expert Group by Tendulkar Method using Mixed Reference Period

Year Number of poor ( million) Rural Urban Total 1993 -94 328.6 74.5 403.7 2004 – 05 326.30 80.80 407.10 2009 - 10 278.21 76.47 354.68 2011 - 12 216.50 52.80 269.30

(Source:https://niti.gov.in/planningcommission.gov.in/docs/data/datatable/index. php?data=datatab)

According the table given above it is seen that number of poor people estimated by expert group by Tendulkar method using mixed reference period in 1993 – 94 and 2011 – 12 was 403.7 million and 269.30 million respectively. There is a decrease in number of poor people by 134.40 million during 1993-94 to 2011-12. In Urban area the number of poor people increased from 1993-94 to 2004-05 by 6.3 million. On the other hand in rural area it has been decreased by 2.3 million. After 2004-2005 the number of poor people has shown continuous decline till 2011-12.

219

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OFMULTIDISCIPLINARYEDUCATIONALRESEARCH ISSN: 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

The rate of annual average decline from 1993-94 to 2011-12 is shown in the following table-

Table No. 2: Annual Average Decline from 1993-94 to 2011-12 Number of Poor (million) year Rural Urban Total 1993-94 to 2004-05 (points per annum) 0.21 - 0.57 - 0.31 2004-05 to 2011-12 (points per annum) 15.69 4.00 19.69 (Source:https://niti.gov.in/planningcommission.gov.in/docs/data/datatable/index. php?data=datatab)

Role of government poverty eradication Poverty reduction is the prime goal of sustainable development Goal. Indian government faces this poverty dilemma in development process. Government focused and planned to reduce poverty rate in the country. Government plays a significant role in socio economic development. Indian government has taken various initiatives to reduce poverty and give the facilities for developing standard of living of the people through employment generation schemes, poverty alleviation and health policy. The schemes launched by Indian Government to eradicate poverty and to fulfill basic needs of human so far can be enumerated as follows:

1. National Food for Work Programme National Food for Work Programme was launched on November 14, 2004 in 150 most backward districts of the country. The prime objective of this scheme was to intensify the generation of supplementary wage employment. The programme is open to all rural poor who are in need of wage employment and desire to do manual unskilled work. Food grains are provided free of cost to the states by the Central. For 2004-05, Rs.2020 crore have been allocated for the programme in addition to 20 lakh tones of foodgrains.

2. Swaranjayanti Gram Swarozgar Yojana (SGSY)

With the aim to bring the assisted poor families (Swarozgaris) above the poverty line SGSY was launched on 1st April 1999. Swarozgaris were organized into Self Help Groups (SHGs). This programme was sponsored by Central and State Government equally.

220

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OFMULTIDISCIPLINARYEDUCATIONALRESEARCH ISSN: 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018

3. Sampoorna Grameen Rozgar Yojana (SGRY) To provide additional wage employment in all rural areas assuring food security and improved nutritional levels, SGRY was launched in 25th September, 2001. The programme is implemented through the Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs).

4. Rural Housing – Indira Awaas Yojana (IAY) The major scheme for free of cost construction of houses for the poor “The Indira Awaas Yojana (IAY)” was operationalised from 1999-2000. The Ministry of Rural Development (MORD) provides equity support to the Housing and Urban Development Corporation (HUDCO) for this purpose.

5. Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme (MGNREGS) Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act was launched on 2nd February, 2006. This scheme was launched to provide at least 100 days wage employment in rural area.

6. Pradhan Mantri Kushal Vikas Yojana On 21st march, 2015, the cabinet cleared a scheme to provide skill training to 1.4 million youth, with an overall outlay of Rs. 1,120 crore. This scheme was launched to provide skill based training.

Other Schemes: Sr. Name of the Scheme/ Programme Year of Objective No. beginning

1. Pradhan Mantri Gramodaya 2000-01 To fulfill basic requirements in rural area Yojana (PMGY) 2. Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana 2014-15 To provide bank accounts to poor 3. Pt. Deen Dayal Upodhyaya 2014-15 To improve employability, skill Sramev Jayate Scheme development and other convenience for labour 4. Prime Minister’s Integrated Urban 1995 To attack urban poverty in an integrated Poverty Eradication Programme manner in 345 towns having population between 50,000 to 1,00,000

Conclusion:

The initiative taken by the government of India for eradicating poverty is gaining success gradually. The schemes studied during the research and many more

221

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OFMULTIDISCIPLINARYEDUCATIONALRESEARCH ISSN: 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 5.818; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286

VOLUME 7, ISSUE 10(1), OCTOBER 2018 programmes launched by Indian government has definitely helped in poverty reduction, employment generation and increased standard of living and assured fulfillment of basic needs. The figures in table no. 1 and table no. 2 witnesses the fruitful impact of remedial measures implemented by the Government of India from time to time.

References:

1. Mishra and Puri 2017 Indian Economy Himalaya Publication New Delhi 2. World Bank. 2001. World Development Report 2000/2001,World Bank, Washington 3. Shaohua Chen and Martin Ravalllon, 2007. Absolute poverty measures for the development world, 1981-2004, 4. Development Research Group, Workd Bank, Washington 5. Government of India. 2014. Report of the Expert Group to 6. Review the Methodology for Measurement of Poverty, 7. Planning Commission, Government of India, Delhi 8. Junofy Anto Rozarina, N. 2013 A Study on Poverty and 9. Reserve Bank of India. 2015. Handbook of Statistical on Indian Economy, Reserve Bank of India, Delhi

Linlks 1. https://www.indiabudget.gov.in/budget_archive/es2004- 05/chapt2005/chap103.pdf 2. https://www.macrotrends.net/countries/IND/india/poverty-rate 3. https://www.businesstoday.in/current/economy-politics/india-has- highest-number-of-people-living-below-poverty-line-world- bank/story/238085.html 4. https://www.developmentnews.in/facts-poverty-india-progress- challenges/ 5. http://www.ascd.org/publications/books/109074/chapters/Understanding- the-Nature-of-Poverty.aspx 6. https://www.soschildrensvillages.ca/news/poverty-in-india-602

222